Allen-Bradley 1336 PLUS FRN 1.xx - 5.xx Adjustable Frequency AC Drive User Manual
The 1336 PLUS FRN 1.xx - 5.xx is a sensorless vector drive designed for use with AC motors in a variety of applications. It is compatible with motors from 0.37 - 448 kW (0.5 - 600 HP). The 1336 PLUS offers features such as adjustable frequency, sensorless vector control, and built-in communication capabilities to provide a flexible and reliable solution for your motor control needs.
Advertisement
Advertisement
1336 PLUS
Adjustable
Frequency AC Drive
with
0.37-448 kW (0.5 - 600 HP)
FRN 1.xx - 5.xx
User Manual
Important User Information
Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment. “Safety Guidelines for the Application,
Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls” (Publication SGI-1.1
available from your local Allen-Bradley Sales Office or online at http://
www.ab.com/manuals/gi) describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard-wired electromechanical devices. Because of this difference, and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment, all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable.
In no event will the Allen-Bradley Company be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment.
The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes. Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation, the Allen-Bradley Company cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams.
No patent liability is assumed by Allen-Bradley Company with respect to use of information, circuits, equipment, or software described in this manual.
Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without written permission of the Allen-Bradley Company is prohibited.
Throughout this manual we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations.
!
ATTENTION: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss.
Attentions help you:
• identify a hazard
• avoid the hazard
• recognize the consequences
Important: Identifies information that is especially important for successful application and understanding of the product.
Shock Hazard labels may be located on or inside the drive to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present.
SCANport is a trademark of Rockwell Automation.
PLC is a registered trademark of Rockwell Automation.
COLOR-KEYED is a registered trademark of Thomas & Betts Corporation.
Summary of Changes
The information below summarizes the changes to the 1336 PLUS
User Manual since the last release.
Description of New or Updated Information
Incorporated 1336S–DU002A–EN–P and 1336 PLUS–5.3DU3
Document Updates.
Notes added to mounting diagram.
See Page(s)
5–54 & 2–36
2–1
!
ATTENTION: With the release of Firmware Version
4.01 & up, the resolution of several parameters has been enhanced to 0.1 units. In some cases this will also affect the Minimum, Maximum and/or Default values of these parameters. Users with PLC or SCANport t device configurations must make the appropriate programming changes. Failure to do so may result in personal injury and/or equipment damage. The parameters affected are:
Minimum Freq
Maximum Freq page 5–11, 5–14 page 5–11, 5–14
Maximum Speed page 5–45
Motor NP Hertz page 5–13, 5–46
Base Frequency
Break Freq
Accel Time 1
Accel Time 2 page 5–53 page 5–52 page 5–10 page 5–16
Decel Time 1
Decel Time 2
DC Hold Time
S Curve Time page 5–10 page 5–16 page 5–17 page 5–23
Notes
Table of Contents
Information and
Precautions
Installation/Wiring
Human Interface Module
Start-Up
Programming
Chapter 1
Manual Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Software Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conventions Used in this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalog Number Explanation
Nameplate Location
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1–1
1–1
1–2
1–2
1–2
1–4
Chapter 2
Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installation Guidelines
AC Supply Source
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Power Conditioning
Input Fusing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Interference – EMI/RFI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RFI Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CE Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control and Signal Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control Interface Option – TB3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting/Verifying Fan Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary Inputs – TB4, TB6
Auxiliary Output – TB9
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interface Board Installation and Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adapter Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–8
2–8
2–8
2–11
2–21
2–23
2–34
2–34
2–35
2–36
2–37
2–37
2–38
2–1
2–2
2–3
2–4
2–5
2–6
2–7
Chapter 3
HIM Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HIM Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–1
3–4
3–15
Chapter 4
Start-Up Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4–1
Chapter 5
Function Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Programming Flow Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5–1
5–1
5–6
ii
Table of Contents
Troubleshooting
Specifications and
Supplemental Information
Dimensions
CE Conformity
Spare Parts Information
Chapter 6
Fault Descriptions
Alarms
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6–1
6–8
Appendix A
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Supplied Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Derating Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameter Cross Reference – By Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parameter Cross Reference – By Name
HIM Character Map
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Communications Data Information Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical Programmable Controller Communications Config. . . . . . . .
Typical Serial Communications Configurations
Read/Write Parameter Record
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A–1
A–4
A–5
A–10
A–11
A–12
A–13
A–14
A–15
A–16
Appendix B
Appendix C
Requirements for Conforming Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mechanical Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C–1
C–2
C–3
C–3
C–4
Appendix D
Manual Objectives
Software Compatibility
Chapter
1
Information and Precautions
Chapter 1 provides information on the general intent of this manual, gives an overall description of the 1336 PLUS Adjustable Frequency
AC Drive and provides a listing of key drive features.
This publication provides planning, installation, wiring and diagnostic information for the 1336 PLUS Drive. To assure successful installation and operation, the material presented must be thoroughly read and understood before proceeding. Particular attention must be directed to the Attention and Important statements contained within.
!
ATTENTION: To guard against machine damage and/or personal injury, drives with ratings above 45 kW
(60 HP) must not be used with software versions below
1.07. Refer to table below.
Three-Phase Drive Rating
1
200-240V 380-480V
0.37-0.75 kW
0.5-1 HP
0.37-1.2 kW
0.5-1.5 HP
1.2-1.5 kW
1.5-2 HP
2.2-3.7 kW
3-5 HP
–
1.5-2.2 kW
2-3 HP
3.7 kW
5 HP
5.5-7.5 kW
7.5-10 HP
5.5-11 kW
7.5-15 HP
15-22 kW
20-30 HP
30-45 kW
40-60 HP
56-93 kW
75-125 HP
–
–
5.5-22 kW
7.5-30 HP
30-45 kW
40-60 HP
45-112 kW
60-150 HP
112-187- kW
150-250 HP
112-336- kW
250-450 HP
187-448 kW
250-600 HP
1
2 kW and HP are constant torque.
See pages 2–28 and 2–29.
500-600V
–
–
–
0.75-3.7 kW
1-5 HP
5.5-15 kW
7.5-20 HP
18.5-45 kW
25-60 HP
56-93 kW
75-125 HP
112-187 kW
150-250 HP
187-336 kW
250-450 HP
224-448 kW
300-600 HP
2.01 & Up
4.01 & Up
2.01 & Up
Version . . .
1.05 & Up or
1.06 w/std. Jog
2
1.05 & Up or
1.06 w/std. Jog
2
1.05 & Up or
1.06 w/std. Jog
2
3.01 & Up (380-480V)
3.02 & Up (500-600V)
1.05 & Up or
1.06 w/std. Jog
2
1.05 & Up or
1.06 w/std. Jog
2
2.01 & Up
Reference
A1
A2
A3
A4
B1/B2
C
D
E
F
G
1–2
Information and Precautions
General Precautions
!
!
!
!
ATTENTION: This drive contains ESD
(Electrostatic Discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies. Static control precautions are required when installing, testing, servicing or repairing this assembly. Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed. If you are not familiar with static control procedures, reference A-B publication 8000-4.5.2, “Guarding Against
Electrostatic Damage” or any other applicable ESD protection handbook.
ATTENTION: An incorrectly applied or installed drive can result in component damage or a reduction in product life. Wiring or application errors, such as, undersizing the motor, incorrect or inadequate AC supply, or excessive ambient temperatures may result in malfunction of the system.
ATTENTION: Only personnel familiar with the
1336 PLUS Adjustable Frequency AC Drive and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation, start-up and subsequent maintenance of the system. Failure to comply may result in personal injury and/or equipment damage.
ATTENTION: To avoid a hazard of electric shock, verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive.
Measure the DC bus voltage at the + & – terminals of
TB1. The voltage must be zero.
Conventions Used in this
Manual
To help differentiate parameter names and display text from other text in this manual, the following conventions will be used:
•
Parameter Names will appear in [brackets]
•
Display Text will appear in “quotes”
Catalog Number Explanation
The diagram on the following page describes the 1336 PLUS catalog numbering scheme.
Information and Precautions
1–3
1336S
First Position
Bulletin Number
BR
Second Position
Voltage
F30
Third Position
Nominal HP Rating
Letter Voltages
AQ 200-240V AC or
310V DC
BR 380-480VAC or
513-620V DC
CW 500-600V AC or
775V DC
or
Code kW (HP)
F05 0.37 (0.5)
F07 0.56 (0.75)
F10 0.75 (1)
F15 1.2 (1.5)
F20 1.5 (2)
F30 2.2 (3)
F50 3.7 (5)
F75 5.5 (7.5)
F100 7.5 (10)
A 200-240V AC
B 380-480V AC
BP 380-480V AC
(F Frame)
BX Special Rating
C
Q
R
500-600V AC
310V DC
513-620V DC
RX Special Rating
W 775V DC
007 5.5 (7.5)
010 7.5 (10)
015 11 (15)
020 15 (20)
025 18.5 (25)
030 22 (30)
040 30 (40)
050 37 (50)
060 45 (60)
075 56 (75)
100 75 (100)
125 93 (125)
150 112 (150)
200 149 (200)
250 187 (250)
1
300 224 (300)
1
350 261 (350)
1
400 298 (400)
1
450 336 (450)
1
500 373 (500)
1
600 448 (600)
1
AA
Fourth Position
Enclosure Type
EN
Fifth Position
Language
Code Type
AA IP 20 (NEMA 1)
AE IP 20 (NEMA 1)/
EMC
0.37-45 kW
(0.5-60 HP) only
AF IP 65 (NEMA 4)
2
AJ IP 54 (NEMA 12)
2
AN IP 00 (Open)
Code Language
EN3 English/English V3.04
EN4 English/English V4.xx
FR3 English/French V3.04
FR4 English/French V4.xx
DE3 English/German V3.04
DE4 English/German V4.xx
IT3 English/Italian V3.04
IT4 English/Italian V4.xx
ES3 English/Spanish V3.04
ES4 English/Spanish V4.xx
MODS
Sixth Position
Options
Code Description
Human Interface Module, IP 20 (Type 1)
HAB Blank – No Functionality
HAP Programmer Only
HA1 Programmer/Controller w/Analog Pot
HA2 Programmer/Controller w/Digital Pot
Human Interface Module, IP 65/54 (Type 4/12)
HJP Programmer Only
HJ2 Programmer/Controller w/Digital Pot
Code Description
Communication Options
GM1 Single Point Remote I/O
GM2 RS–232/422/485, DF1 & DH485
GM5 DeviceNet
Control Interface Options
L4 TTL Contact
L4E TTL Contact & Encoder Feedback
L5 24V AC/DC
L5E 24V AC/DC & Encoder Feedback
L6 115V AC
L6E 115V AC & Encoder Feedback
1
G Frame Drives in enclosed construction are supplied through the Configured Drives Program.
2
D through G Frame drives in IP 65 (NEMA Type 4) and IP 54 (NEMA Type 12) configurations are supplied through the Configured Drives Program.
1–4
Information and Precautions
Nameplate Location
1336 PLUS Nameplate Location
1
Refer to page 1-1 for frame reference classifications.
ESC SEL
JOG
Nameplate Located on
Bottom Portion of
Chassis Behind Cover
Frames
1
A1, A2, A3, A4
Nameplate Located on
Mounting Plate of
Main Control Board
Frames
1
B - G
Mounting
Chapter
2
Installation/Wiring
Chapter 2 provides the information you need to properly mount and wire the 1336 PLUS Drive. Since most start-up difficulties are the result of incorrect wiring, every precaution must be taken to assure that the wiring is done as instructed. All items must be read and understood before the actual installation begins.
!
ATTENTION: The following information is merely a guide for proper installation. The Allen-Bradley
Company cannot assume responsibility for the compliance or the noncompliance to any code, national, local or otherwise for the proper installation of this drive or associated equipment. A hazard of personal injury and/or equipment damage exists if codes are ignored during installation.
Minimum Mounting Requirements for Proper Heat Dissipation
(Dimensions shown are between drives or other devices)
152.4 mm
(6.0 in.)
ESC SEL
JOG
101.6 mm
(4.0 in.)
152.4 mm
(6.0 in.)
ESC
JOG
UP
152.4 mm
(6.0 in.)
152.4 mm
(6.0 in.)
Important:
A4 Frame drives should not be mounted on a combustible surface. However, if the drive must be mounted on a combustible surface, 6.35 mm (0.25 in.) spacers must be provided under the mounting feet of the drive.
F Frame drives require a minimum of 152.4 mm (6.0 in.) between the drive back and mounting wall, if drives are mounted with sides touching another device or wall.
A minimum of 76.2 mm (3.0 in.) is required on the sides if the back of the drive is mounted against a wall or other device.
2–2
Installation/Wiring
Installation Guidelines
GND
AC Supply Source
Page 2–3
Input Power Conditioning
Page 2–4
CAT. NO.
FREQUENCY
POWER RATING
PRIMARY VOLTAGE
SECONDARY VOLTAGE
INSULATION CLASS
NO. OF PHASES
VENDOR PART NO.
ALLEN-BRADLEY
PE R
GND (L1)
S T
(L2) (L3)
ESC SEL
JOG
PE
GND
(T1)
U
(T2)
V
(T3)
W
Input Fusing
Input Devices
Input Filters
Page 2–5
Page 2–6
Page 2–7
Electrical Interference
Page 2–7
Grounding
Page 2–8
Power Cabling
Page 2–11
Control & Signal Cabling
Output Devices
Cable Termination
Page 2–21
Page 2–34
Page 2–34
Motor
AC Supply Source
Installation/Wiring
2–3
1336 PLUS drives are suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering up to a maximum of 200,000 rms symmetrical amperes,
600 volts maximum when used with the AC input line fuses specified in Table 2.A.
!
ATTENTION: To guard against personal injury and/or equipment damage caused by improper fusing, use only the recommended line fuses specified in Table 2.A.
Unbalanced Distribution Systems
This drive is designed to operate on three-phase supply systems whose line voltages are symmetrical. Surge suppression devices are included to protect the drive from lightning induced overvoltages between line and ground. Where the potential exists for abnormally high phase-to-ground voltages (in excess of 125% of nominal), or where the supply ground is tied to another system or equipment that could cause the ground potential to vary with operation, suitable isolation is required for the drive. Where this potential exists, an isolation transformer is strongly recommended.
Ungrounded Distribution Systems
All 1336 PLUS drives are equipped with an MOV (Metal Oxide
Varistor) that provides voltage surge protection and phase-to-phase plus phase-to-ground protection which is designed to meet IEEE
587. The MOV circuit is designed for surge suppression only
(transient line protection), not continuous operation.
With ungrounded distribution systems, the phase-to-ground MOV connection could become a continuous current path to ground.
Energy ratings are listed below. Exceeding the published line-to-line and line-to-ground voltage ratings may cause physical damage to the
MOV. Refer to page A–1.
Three-Phase
AC Input
Ground
R
S
T
Joules = (A)
Joules = (A)
Joules = (A)
Joules = (B)
Line-to-Line MOV Rating
Energy Rating = 2 x Line-Line Rating (A)
Line-to-Ground MOV Rating
Energy Rating = Line-Line (A) + Line-Ground (B)
1 2 3 4
Frame Reference
Device Rating (V)
Line-Line (A)
Line-Ground (B)
A
240 480 600
160 140 NA
220 220 NA
B-C
240 480 600
160 160 160
220 220 220
D-G
240 480 600
140 140 150
220 220 220
2–4
Installation/Wiring
Input Power Conditioning
In general, the 1336 PLUS is suitable for direct connection to an AC line of the correct voltage. Certain conditions can exist, however, that prompt consideration of a line reactor or isolation transformer ahead of the drive.
The basic rules to aid in determining whether a line reactor or isolation transformer should be considered are as follows:
1. If the AC source experiences frequent power outages or significant voltage transients, users should calculate the kVA max
(see formula below). If the source transformer kVA exceeds the calculated kVA max
and the drive is installed close to the source, it is an indication that there may be enough energy behind these voltage transients to cause nuisance input fuse blowing, overvoltage faults or drive power structure damage. In these cases, a line reactor or isolation transformer should be considered.
Z drive
VA
(
Ω/Φ max
=
) =
V line–line
√
3 x Input Amps
(V line–line
)
2
x % Source Leakage (5-6% typical)
Z drive
x 0.01
2. If the AC source does not have a neutral or one phase referenced to ground (see Unbalanced Distribution Systems on page 2–3), an isolation transformer with the neutral of the secondary grounded is highly recommended. If the line-to-ground voltages on any phase can exceed 125% of the nominal line-to-line voltage, an isolation transformer with the neutral of the secondary grounded, is highly recommended.
3. If the AC line supplying the drive has power factor correction capacitors that are switched in and out, an isolation transformer or
5% line reactor is recommended between the drive and capacitors. If the capacitors are permanently connected and not switched, the general rules above apply.
Installation/Wiring
2–5
Input Fusing
!
ATTENTION: The 1336 PLUS does not provide input power short circuit fusing. Specifications for the recommended fuse size and type to provide drive input power protection against short circuits are provided.
Branch circuit breakers or disconnect switches cannot provide this level of protection for drive components.
Table 2.A
Maximum Recommended AC Input Line Fuse Ratings (fuses are user supplied)
1
European
Installations
drives. Fuses that meet BS88 Parts 1 t bl f F t b li it d t th f ll
A F i
Parts 1 & 2: AC, AD, BC, BD, CD,
The recommended fuse is Class gG, general industrial applications and be used for these drives. G Frame
North American
Installations
The recommended fuse is Class gG, UL requirements specify general industrial applications and C CC
Type J:
Type T:
Both fast acting and slow blow are acceptable.
2
JKS, LPJ
JJS, JJN
Bussmann FWP/Gould
Q QS
Drive Catalog
Number
1336S- _ _ F05, 7
1336S- _ _ F10
1336S- _ _ F15
1336S- _ _ F20
1336S- _ _ F30
1336S- _ _ F50
1336S- _ _ F75
1336S- _ _ F100
1336S- _ _ 007
1336S- _ _ 010
1336S- _ _ 015
1336S- _ _ 020
1336S- _ _ 025
1336S- _ _ 030
1336S- _ _ 040
1336S- _ _ 050
1336S- _ _ X060
1336S- _ _ 060
1336S- _ _ 075
1336S- _ _ 100
1336S- _ _ 125
1336S- _ _ X150
1336S- _ _ 150
1336S- _ _ 200
1336S- _ _ 250
1336S- _ _ X300
1336S- _ P250
3
1336S- _ _ X250
1336S- _ _ 300
1336S- _ P300
3
1336S- _ _ 350
1336S- _ P350
1336S- _ _ 400
1336S- _ P400
1336S- _ _ 450
1336S- _ P450
1336S- _ _ 500
1336S- _ _ 600
3
3
3
187 (250)
224 (300)
187 (250)
187 (250)
224 (300)
224 (300)
261 (350)
261 (350)
298 (400)
298 (400)
336 (450)
336 (450)
373 (500)
448 (600)
37 (50)
45 (60)
45 (60)
56 (75)
75 (100)
93 (125)
112 (150)
112 (150)
149 (200)
kW (HP) Rating
0.37-0.56 (0.5-0.75)
0.75 (1)
1.2 (1.5)
1.5 (2)
2.2 (3)
3.7 (5)
5.5 (7.5)
7.5 (10)
5.5 (7.5)
7.5 (10)
11 (15)
15 (20)
18.5 (25)
22 (30)
30 (40)
Dual element-time delay fuses are required.
100A
100A
125A
150A
200A
250A
250A
300A
400A
450A
–
450A
3
450A
450A
500A
3
500A
600A
3
600A
600A
3
800A
700A
3
800A
900A
30A
35A
45A
60A
70A
80A
380-480V
Rating
3A
2
6A
2
6A
2
10A
2
15A
2
20A
2
20A
2
30A
2
20A
–
3
Fuses are supplied with F Frame drives.
200A
–
250A
300A
–
–
–
400A
450A
50A
70A
100A
100A
125A
150A
–
–
200-240V
Rating
6A
2
10A
2
15A
2
15A
2
25A
2
40A
2
40A
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
80A
–
90A
110A
150A
175A
–
225A
350A
15A
20A
25A
35A
40A
50A
60A
–
–
400A
400A
400A
–
450A
–
500A
–
600A
–
800A
800A
500-600V
Rating
–
6A
2
–
10A
2
15A
2
20A
2
–
2–6
Installation/Wiring
Input Devices
Starting and Stopping the Motor
!
ATTENTION: The drive start/stop control circuitry includes solid-state components. If hazards due to accidental contact with moving machinery or unintentional flow of liquid, gas or solids exist, an additional hardwired stop circuit may be required to remove AC line power to the drive. When AC power is removed, there will be a loss of inherent regenerative braking effect & the motor will coast to a stop. An auxiliary braking method may be required.
Repeated Application/Removal of Input Power
!
ATTENTION: The drive is intended to be controlled by control input signals that will start and stop the motor. A device that routinely disconnects then reapplies line power to the drive for the purpose of starting and stopping the motor is not recommended.
Bypass Contactors
!
ATTENTION: An incorrectly applied or installed bypass system can result in component damage or reduction in product life. The most common causes are:
•
Wiring AC line to drive output or control terminals.
•
Improper bypass or output circuits not approved by
Allen-Bradley.
•
Output circuits which do not connect directly to the motor.
Contact Allen-Bradley for assistance with application or wiring.
Electrical Interference –
EMI/RFI
Installation/Wiring
2–7
Immunity
The immunity of 1336 PLUS drives to externally generated interference is good. Usually, no special precautions are required beyond the installation practices provided in this publication.
It is recommended that the coils of DC energized contactors associated with drives be suppressed with a diode or similar device, since they can generate severe electrical transients.
Emission
Careful attention must be given to the arrangement of power and ground connections to the drive to avoid interference with nearby sensitive equipment. The cable to the motor carries switched voltages and should be routed well away from sensitive equipment.
The ground conductor of the motor cable should be connected to the drive ground (PE) terminal directly. Connecting this ground conductor to a cabinet ground point or ground bus bar may cause high frequency current to circulate in the ground system of the enclosure. The motor end of this ground conductor must be solidly connected to the motor case ground.
Shielded or armored cable may be used to guard against radiated emissions from the motor cable. The shield or armor should be connected to the drive ground (PE) terminal and the motor ground as outlined above.
Common mode chokes at the drive output can help reduce common mode noise on installations that do not use shielded cable. Common mode chokes can also be used on analog or communication cables.
Refer to page 2–34 for further information.
An RFI filter can be used and in most situations provides an effective reduction of RFI emissions that may be conducted into the main supply lines.
If the installation combines a drive with sensitive devices or circuits, it is recommended that the lowest possible drive PWM carrier frequency be programmed.
2–8
RFI Filtering
Installation/Wiring
CE Conformity
Grounding
1336 PLUS drives can be installed with an RFI filter, which controls radio-frequency conducted emissions into the main supply lines and ground wiring.
If the cabling and installation recommendation precautions described in this manual are adhered to, it is unlikely that interference problems will occur when the drive is used with conventional industrial electronic circuits and systems. However, a filter may be required if there is a likelihood of sensitive devices or circuits being installed on the same AC supply.
Where it is essential that very low emission levels must be achieved or if conformity with standards is required the optional RFI filter must be used. Refer to Appendix C and instructions included with the filter for installation and grounding information.
Refer to Appendix C.
Refer to the grounding diagram on page 2–10. The drive must be connected to system ground at the power ground (PE) terminal provided on the power terminal block (TB1). Ground impedance must conform to the requirements of national and local industrial safety regulations (NEC, VDE 0160, BSI, etc.) and should be inspected and tested at appropriate and regular intervals.
In any cabinet, a single, low-impedance ground point or ground bus bar should be used. All circuits should be grounded independently and directly. The AC supply ground conductor should also be connected directly to this ground point or bus bar.
Sensitive Circuits
It is essential to define the paths through which the high frequency ground currents flow. This will assure that sensitive circuits do not share a path with such current. Control and signal conductors should not be run near or parallel to power conductors.
Motor Cable
The ground conductor of the motor cable (drive end) must be connected directly to the drive ground (PE) terminal, not to the enclosure bus bar. Grounding directly to the drive (and filter, if installed) can provide a direct route for high frequency current returning from the motor frame and ground conductor. At the motor end, the ground conductor should also be connected to the motor case ground.
If shielded or armored cables are used, the shield/armor should also be grounded at both ends as described above.
Installation/Wiring
2–9
Encoder & Communications Cabling
If encoder connections or communications cables are used, the wiring must be separated from power cabling. This can be accomplished with carefully routed, shielded cable (ground cable shield at the drive end only) or a separate steel conduit (grounded at both ends). Belden
9730, 8777 (or equivalent) is recommended for encoder cable runs less than 30 meters (100 feet). Belden 9773 (or equivalent) is recommended for encoder cable runs greater than 30 meters (100 feet).
Discrete Control and Signal Wiring
The control and signal wiring must be grounded at a single point in the system, remote from the drive. This means the 0V or ground terminal should be grounded at the equipment end, not the drive end.
If shielded control and signal wires are used, the shield must also be grounded at this point.
If the control and signal wires are short, and contained within a cabinet which has no sensitive circuits, the use of shielded control and signal wiring is not necessary. The recommended control signal wire is:
•
Belden 8760 (or equiv.)–0.750 mm
2
(18 AWG), twisted pair, shielded.
•
Belden 8770 (or equiv.)–0.750 mm
2
(18 AWG), 3 conductor, shielded.
•
Belden 9460 (or equiv.)–0.750 mm
2
(18 AWG), twisted pair, shielded.
Shield Termination – TE (True Earth)
The TE terminal block (not available on 0.37-7.5 kW (0.5-10 HP) A
Frame drives) is used for all control signal shields internal to the drive. It must be connected to an earth ground by a separate continuous lead. Refer to Figure 2.1/2.3 for location.
The maximum and minimum wire size accepted by this block is 2.1
and 0.30 mm
2
(14 and 22 AWG). Maximum torque is 1.36 N-m
(12 lb.-in.). Use Copper wire Only.
Safety Ground – PE
This is the safety ground required by code. This point must be connected to adjacent building steel (girder, joist) or a floor ground rod, provided grounding points comply with NEC regulations. If a cabinet ground bus is used, refer to Grounding on page 2–8.
RFI Filter
Important:
Using an optional RFI filter may result in relatively high ground leakage currents. Surge suppression devices are also incorporated in the filter. Therefore, the filter must be permanently installed and solidly grounded to the supply neutral. Grounding must not rely on flexible cables and should not include any form of plug or socket that would permit inadvertent disconnection. The integrity of this connection should be periodically checked.
2–10
Installation/Wiring
Conduit/4-Wire Cable
Nearest
Building Structure Steel
General Grounding
R (L1)
S (L2)
T (L3)
PE
ESC SEL
JOG
U (T1)
V (T2)
W (T3)
PE/Gnd.
Common
Mode
Core*
Shield*
Shield
Motor
Terminator*
Motor Frame
PE
Ground per
Local Codes RIO/DH+ or Analog
Common
Mode Core*
To Computer/Position Controller
(for TE shield ground, see "Control Connections")
* Options that can be installed as needed. See pages 2–34 and 2–35.
Nearest
Building Structure Steel
R (L1)
Single-Point Grounding/Panel Layout
S (L2)
T (L3)
To Nearest Building
Structure Steel
For Programmable Controller grounding recommendations, refer to publication 1770-4.1
TE – Zero Volt Potential Bus
(Isolated from Panel)
1336 FORCE 1336 PLUS
Logic
PE TE
ESC SEL
JOG
PE
Logic
Nearest Building
Structure Steel
PE Ground Bus
(Grounded to Panel)
Important: Grounding requirements will vary with the drives being used. Drives with True Earth (TE) terminals must have a zero potential bus, separate from potential earth (PE) ground bus. Note that buses can be tied together at one point in the control cabinet or brought back separately to the building ground grid (tied within 3 meters (10 feet)).
Power Cabling
Installation/Wiring
2–11
Input and output power connections are performed through terminal block, TB1 (see Figure 2.1 for location).
Important:
For maintenance and setup procedures, the drive may be operated without a motor connected.
Table 2.B
TB1 Signals
Terminal
PE
TE
R (L1), S (L2), T (L3)
+DC, –DC
U (T1), V (T2), W (T3)
Description
Potential Earth Ground
Shield Termination – True Earth
AC Line Input Terminals
DC Bus Terminals
Motor Connection
!
ATTENTION: The National Codes and standards
(NEC, VDE, BSI etc.) and local codes outline provisions for safely installing electrical equipment.
Installation must comply with specifications regarding wire types, conductor sizes, branch circuit protection and disconnect devices. Failure to do so may result in personal injury and/or equipment damage.
TB1
TB2
TB3
TB4
TB6
TB9
TE
Power Terminal Block
Control & Signal Wiring
Control Interface Option
24V DC Auxiliary Input
High Voltage DC Auxiliary Input
480 or 600V Auxiliary Output (F Frame Only)
Shield Terminals
Figure 2.1
Terminal Block Locations
TB3
TB1
Frames A1-A4
1
TB2
TB1
Control Interface
Option
TB1
Frames B, C
1
TB4
TB6
TB3
TB2
TB1
Control Interface
Option
TB1
Location
Frames D, E
1
TB3
TB4
TB2
TE
TB6
TB1
1
Refer to page 1–1 for frame reference classifications and Figure 2.2 for TB1 details.
TB9
TB1 Location
TB3
TB2
TE
TB1
Brake
Terminals
Frame F
1
R, S, T
TB1
Location
TB3
TB2
TE
U, V, W
& Brake
Terminals
PE
Ground
Frame G
1
2–12
Installation/Wiring
Table 2.C
TB1 Specifications – Use 75
°
C Copper wire Only
1
2
3
Drive Frame
Size
A1-A4 (page 2–18)
B1 (page 2–18)
B2 (page 2–18)
C (page 2–18)
D (page 2–19)
3
E (page 2–19)
3
F (page 2–20)
3
G (page 2–20)
3
Max./Min. Wire Size
1
mm
2
(AWG)
5.3/0.8 (10/18)
8.4/0.8 (8/18)
13.3/0.5 (6/20)
26.7/0.8 (3/18)
127.0/2.1 (250 MCM/14)
67.4/2.1 (00/14)
2
253.0/2.1 (500 MCM/14)
303.6/2.1 (600 MCM/14)
303.6/2.1 (600 MCM/14)
Maximum Torque
N-m (lb.-in.)
1.81 (16)
1.81 (16)
1.70 (15)
5.65 (50)
6.00 (52)
6.00 (52)
10.00 (87)
23.00 (200)
23.00 (200)
Wire sizes given are maximum/minimum sizes that TB1 will accept – these are not recommendations.
Applies to 30 kW (40 HP) 200-240V, 45 & 56 kW (60 & 75 HP) 380-480V, 56 kW (75 HP) 500-600V drives only.
These configurations of TB1 are stud type terminations and require the use of lug type connectors to terminate field installed conductors. Lug kits are available for use with these configurations. Wire size used is determined by selecting the proper lug based on the drive catalog number. Refer to Table 2.D.
Lug Kits
D, E, F and G Frame drives have stud type terminals and/or bus bars/bolts that require standard “crimp type” connectors for cable termination. Connectors such as T & B Color-Keyed
connectors (or equivalent) are recommended. The following table shows the lug selection for one possible cable choice. Connectors for each installation should be chosen based on desired cable sizes, the application requirements and all applicable national, state and local codes. See the minimum/maximum values for wire size per Table
2.C.
Installation/Wiring
2–13
Table 2.D
Lug Selection
1
2
3
Drive Catalog
Number
1336S–A040
1336S–A050
1336S–A060
1336S–A075
AC Input R, S, T
Output U, V, W and PE
Cable (per Phase)
Qty. mm
2
(AWG)
(1) 53.5 (1/0)
(1) 85.0 (3/0)
(1) 107.2 (4/0)
(2) 53.5 (1/0)
T&B Part No.
3
Qty. Number
(8) 54153
1
(8) 54163
1
(8) 54168
1
(8) 54109T
(8) 54109B
1336S–A100
1336S–A125
1336S–B060
1336S–B075
1336S–B100
1336S–B125
1336S–B200
1336S–B250
(2)
(2)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(2)
(2)
85.0 (3/0)
107.2 (4/0)
42.4 (1)
53.5 (1/0)
85.0 (3/0)
107.2 (4/0)
1336S–BX150 (1) 107.2 (4/0)
1336S–B150 (2) 53.5 (1/0)
85.0 (3/0)
107.2 (4/0)
1336S–BX250 (3) 53.5 (1/0)
1336S–BP250 (3) 53.5 (1/0)
1336S–B300 (3) 67.4 (2/0)
1336S–BP300 (3) 67.4 (2/0)
1336S–B350 (3) 85.0 (3/0)
1336S–BP350 (3) 85.0 (3/0)
1336S–B400 (3) 107.2 (4/0)
(24) 54109
(24) 54109
(24) 54110
(24) 54110
(24) 54111
(24) 54111
(24) 54112
1336S–BP400 (3) 107.2 (4/0)
1336S–B450 (3) 127.0 (250 MCM)
(24) 54112
(24) 54174
1336S–BP450 (3) 127.0 (250 MCM) (24) 54174
1336S–B500 (3) 152.0 (300 MCM) (24) 54179
1336S–B600
1336S–C075
1336S–C100
1336S–C125
1336S–C150
1336S–C200
(3) 152.0 (300 MCM) (24) 54179
(1)
(1)
(1)
33.6 (2)
53.5 (1/0)
67.4 (2/0)
(1) 107.2 (4/0)
(2) 67.4 (2/0)
(8) 54142
1
(8) 54153
1
(8) 54158
1
(8) 54111
(8) 54110T
(8) 54110B
(8) 54111T
(8) 54111B
(8) 54112T
(8) 54112B
(8) 54147
1
(8) 54153
1
(8) 54163
1
(8) 54168
1
(8) 54168
1
(8) 54109T
(8) 54109B
(8) 54111T
(8) 54111B
(8) 54112T
(8) 54112B
1336S–C250 (2) 85.0 (3/0)
1336S–CX300 (3) 85.0 (3/0)
1336S–C300 (3) 85.0 (3/0)
1336S–C350
1336S–C400
(3)
(3)
53.5 (1/0)
67.4 (2/0)
1336S–C450
1336S–C500
1336S–C600
(3)
(3)
85.0 (3/0)
107.2 (4/0)
(8) 54111T
(8) 54111B
(16) 54111
(16) 54111
(24) 54109
(24) 54110
(24) 54111
(24) 54112
(3) 127.0 (250 MCM) (24) 54174
DC+
DC–
2
Cable (per Phase)
Qty. mm
2
(AWG)
(1) 13.3 (6)
(1) 13.3 (6)
(1) 13.3 (6)
(1) 33.6 (2)
(1) 42.4 (1)
(1) 67.4 (2/0)
(1) 8.4 (8)
(1) 13.3 (6)
(1) 13.3 (6)
(1) 26.7 (3)
(1) 26.7 (3)
(1) 33.6 (2)
(1) 42.4 (1)
(1) 67.4 (2/0)
(1) 67.4 (2/0)
(1) 67.4 (2/0)
(1) 42.4 (1)
(1) 42.4 (1)
(1) 42.4 (1)
(1) 42.4 (1)
(1) 42.4 (1)
(1) 42.4 (1)
(1) 42.4 (1)
(1) 42.4 (1)
(1) 53.5 (1/0)
(1) 53.5 (1/0)
(1) 13.3 (6)
(1) 13.3 (6)
(1) 26.7 (3)
(1) 42.4 (1)
(1) 42.4 (1)
(1) 67.4 (2/0)
T&B Part No.
3
Qty. Number
(2) 54135
1
(2) 54135
1
(2) 54135
1
(2) 54109
(2) 54148
(2) 54110
(2) 54131
1
(2) 54135
1
(2) 54135
1
(2) 54147
1
(2) 54147
1
(2) 54110
(2) 54148
(2) 54110
(2) 54110
(2) 54110
(2) 54148
(2) 54148
(2) 54148
(2) 54148
(2) 54148
(2) 54148
(2) 54148
(2) 54148
(2) 54109
(2) 54109
(2) 54135
1
(2) 54135
1
(2) 54147
1
(2) 54148
(2) 54148
(2) 54110
TE
Cable (per Phase)
Qty. mm
2
(AWG)
(1) 13.3 (6)
(1) 13.3 (6)
(1) 21.2 (4)
(1) 21.2 (4)
(1) 33.6 (2)
(1) 33.6 (2)
(1) 26.7 (3)
(1) 33.6 (2)
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
(1) 13.3 (6)
(1) 13.3 (6)
(1) 13.3 (6)
(1) 21.2 (4)
(1) 21.2 (4)
(1) 21.2 (4)
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
(1) 8.4 (8)
(1) 13.3 (6)
(1) 13.3 (6)
(1) 13.3 (6)
(1) 26.7 (3)
(1) 26.7 (3)
T&B Part No.
3
Qty. Number
(1) 54135
1
(1) 54135
1
(1) 54139
1
(1) 54139
1
(1) 54142
1
(1) 54142
1
(1) 54135
1
(1) 54135
1
(1) 54135
1
(1) 54139
1
(1) 54139
1
(1) 54139
1
(1) 54142
1
(1) 54142
1
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
(1) 54131
1
(1) 54135
1
(1) 54135
1
(1) 54135
1
(1) 54142
1
(1) 54142
1
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
NA
5/16” Stud. All other studs are 3/8”.
Lugs shown for DC+/– are based on dynamic brake sizing of 50% of (motor rating X 1.25). Select proper lugs based on required braking torque. Refer to 1336-5.64
or 1336-5.65 for additional information.
T & B COLOR-KEYED
Connectors require T & B WT117 or TBM–6 Crimper tool or equivalent. Lugs should be crimped according to manufacturer’s tool instructions. If required, Rockwell Automation can supply lug kits for lugs shown above. Kits do not include crimping tools. Consult factory for kit information.
2–14
Installation/Wiring
Motor Cables
A variety of cable types are acceptable for drive installations. For many installations, unshielded cable is adequate, provided it can be separated from sensitive circuits. As an approximate guide, allow a spacing of 0.3 meters (1 foot) for every 10 meters (32.8 feet) of length. In all cases, long parallel runs must be avoided. Do not use cable with an insulation thickness less than or equal to 15 mils.
The cable should be 4-conductor with the ground lead being connected directly to the drive ground terminal (PE) and the motor frame ground terminal.
Shielded Cable
Shielded cable is recommended if sensitive circuits or devices are connected or mounted to the machinery driven by the motor. The shield must be connected to both the drive ground (drive end) and motor frame ground (motor end). The connection must be made at both ends to minimize interference.
If cable trays or large conduits are to be used to distribute the motor leads for multiple drives, shielded cable is recommended to reduce or capture the noise from the motor leads and minimize “cross coupling” of noise between the leads of different drives. The shield should be connected to the ground connections at both the motor and drive end.
Armored cable also provides effective shielding. Ideally it should be grounded only at the drive (PE) and motor frame. Some armored cable has a PVC coating over the armor to prevent incidental contact with grounded structure. If, due to the type of connector, the armor is grounded at the cabinet entrance, shielded cable should be used within the cabinet if power leads will be run close to control signals.
In some hazardous environments it is not permissible to ground both ends of the cable armor because of the possibility of high current circulating at the input frequency if the ground loop is cut by a strong magnetic field. This only applies in the proximity of powerful electrical machines. In such cases, consult factory for specific guidelines.
Installation/Wiring
2–15
Conduit
If metal conduit is preferred for cable distribution, the following guidelines must be followed.
•
Drives are normally mounted in cabinets and ground connections are made at a common ground point in the cabinet. Normal installation of conduit provides grounded connections to both the motor frame ground (junction box) and drive cabinet ground.
These ground connections help minimize interference. This is a noise reduction recommendation only, and does not affect the requirements for safety grounding (refer to pages 2–8 and
2–9).
•
No more than three sets of motor leads can be routed through a single conduit. This will minimize “cross talk” that could reduce the effectiveness of the noise reduction methods described. If more than three drive/motor connections per conduit are required, shielded cable as described above must be used. If practical, each conduit should contain only one set of motor leads.
!
ATTENTION: To avoid a possible shock hazard caused by induced voltages, unused wires in the conduit must be grounded at both ends. For the same reason, if a drive sharing a conduit is being serviced or installed, all drives using this conduit should be disabled. This will eliminate the possible shock hazard from “cross coupled” drive motor leads.
Motor Lead Lengths
Installations with long cables to the motor may require the addition of output reactors or cable terminators to limit voltage reflections at the motor. Refer to Tables 2.E and 2.F for the maximum length cable allowed for various installation techniques.
For installations that exceed the recommended maximum lengths listed, contact the factory.
2–16
Installation/Wiring
Table 2.E
Maximum Motor Cable Length Restrictions in meters (feet) – 380V-480V Drives
1
No External Devices
Motor
B 1329 1329R/L A
Drive Drive kW Motor kW
Frame
A1
A2
(HP) (HP)
Cable
0.37 (0.5) 0.37 (0.5) 12.2
(40)
0.75 (1) 0.75 (1) 12.2
(40)
0.37 (0.5) 12.2
(40)
1.2 (1.5) 1.2 (1.5) 12.2
(40)
0.75 (1) 12.2
(40)
Cable
33.5
(110)
33.5
(110)
33.5
(110)
33.5
(110)
33.5
(110)
Cable
91.4
(300)
91.4
(300)
91.4
(300)
91.4
(300)
91.4
(300)
Cable
7
91.4
(300)
91.4
(300)
91.4
(300)
91.4
(300)
91.4
(300)
A3
1.5 (2)
2.2 (3)
3.7 (5)
0.37 (0.5) 12.2
(40)
1.5 (2) 7.6
(25)
1.2 (1.5) 7.6
(25)
0.75 (1) 7.6
(25)
0.37 (0.5) 7.6
(25)
2.2 (3)
1.5 (2)
7.6
(25)
7.6
(25)
0.75 (1) 7.6
(25)
0.37 (0.5) 7.6
(25)
3.7 (5) 7.6
(25)
33.5
(110)
12.2
(40)
12.2
(40)
12.2
(40)
12.2
(40)
12.2
(40)
12.2
(40)
12.2
(40)
12.2
(40)
12.2
(40)
114.3
(375)
91.4
(300)
114.3
(375)
114.3
(375)
114.3
(375)
91.4
(300)
114.3
(375)
114.3
(375)
114.3
(375)
114.3
(375)
91.4
(300)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
Note
121.9
(400)
91.4
(300)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
2.2 (3) 7.6
(25)
12.2
(40)
114.3
(375) applications/ installations
1.5 (2) 7.6
(25)
12.2
(40)
114.3
(375) motors, no
A4
B
C
D
E
F
G
5.5-7.5
(7.5-10)
5.5-22
(7.5-30)
30-45
(X40-X60)
45-112
(60-X150)
112-187
(150-250)
187-336
(250-450)
187-448
(X250-600)
0.75 (1) 7.6
(25)
0.37 (0.5) 7.6
(25)
5.5-7.5
(7.5-10)
5.5-22
(7.5-30)
30-45
(40-60)
45-112
(60-150)
7.6
(25)
7.6
(25)
7.6
(25)
12.2
(40)
112-224
(150-300)
187-336
(250-450)
187-448
(250-600)
12.2
(40)
18.3
(60)
18.3
(60)
12.2
(40)
12.2
(40)
12.2
(40)
12.2
(40)
12.2
(40)
30.5
(100)
53.3
(175)
53.3
(175)
53.3
(175)
114.3
(375)
114.3
(375)
114.3
(375)
114.3
(375)
114.3
(375)
114.3
(375)
114.3
(375)
114.3
(375)
114.3
(375) lead length reflection are
You should standard practices for cable and other issues.
For retrofit situations, , the motor for insulation rating.
91.4
(300)
91.4
(300)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
w/ 1204-TFB2 Term.
Motor
w/ 1204-TFA1 Terminator
Motor
A or B
Cable Type
Shld.
3
Unshld.
1329 A B
Cable Type
Cable
Shld.
3
Unshld.
Cable Type
Shld.
3
Unshld.
Use 1204-TFA1
30.5
(100)
30.5
(100)
30.5
(100)
61.0
(200)
30.5
(100)
61.0
(200)
30.5
(100)
30.5
(100)
30.5
(100)
61.0
(200)
30.5
(100)
61.0
(200)
91.4
(300)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
91.4
(300)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
30.5
(100)
30.5
(100)
30.5
(100)
30.5
(100)
30.5
(100)
30.5
(100)
30.5
(100)
30.5
(100)
30.5
(100)
30.5
(100)
30.5
(100)
30.5
(100)
30.5
(100)
30.5
(100)
61.0
(200)
61.0
(200)
61.0
(200)
91.4
(300)
91.4
(300)
91.4
(300)
91.4
(300)
61.0
(200)
61.0
(200)
61.0
(200)
61.0
(200)
61.0
(200)
61.0
(200)
61.0
(200)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
U 1204 TFB2
Reactor at Drive
Motor
1329 A
2
B or 1329
Type A Motor Characteristics:
No phase paper or misplaced phase paper, lower quality insulation systems, corona inception voltages between 850 and 1000 volts.
Type B Motor Characteristics:
Properly placed phase paper, medium quality insulation systems, corona inception voltages between 1000 and 1200 volts.
1329R Motors:
These AC Variable Speed motors are “Power Matched” for use with Allen-Bradley Drives. Each motor is energy efficient and designed to meet or exceed the requirements of the Federal Energy Act of 1992. All 1329R motors are optimized for variable speed operation and include premium inverter grade insulation systems which meet or exceed NEMA MG1. Part 31.40.4.2.
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
91.4
(300)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
Cable
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
24.4
(80)
24.4
(80)
76.2
(250)
61.0
(200)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
22.9
(75)
22.9
(75)
22.9
(75)
22.9
(75)
22.9
(75)
Cable
22.9
(75)
22.9
(75)
22.9
(75)
22.9
(75)
22.9
(75)
22.9
(75)
22.9
(75)
22.9
(75)
22.9
(75)
22.9
(75)
22.9
(75)
22.9
(75)
22.9
(75)
22.9
(75)
91.4
(300)
91.4
(300)
121.9
(400)
91.4
(300)
182.9
(600)
Cable
91.4
(300)
91.4
(300)
91.4
(300)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
Installation/Wiring
2–17
Drive
Frame
A4
Drive kW
(HP)
0.75 (1)
B
C
D
E
F
G
1.5 (2)
2.2 (3)
3.7 (5)
5.5-15
(7.5-20)
18.5-45
(25-60)
56-93
(75-125)
112-224
(150-X300)
187-336
(250-450)
224-448
(300-600)
Motor kW
(HP)
0.75 (1)
0.37 (0.5)
1.5 (2)
1.2 (1.5)
0.75 (1)
0.37 (0.5)
2.2 (3)
1.5 (2)
0.75 (1)
0.37 (0.5)
3.7 (5)
2.2 (3)
1.5 (2)
0.75 (1)
0.37 (0.5)
5.5-15
(7.5-20)
18.5-45
(25-60)
56-93
(75-125)
112-224
(150-X300)
187-336
(250-450)
224-448
(300-600)
No External Devices
Motor
A
Any
Cable
NR
B
Any
Cable
NR
1329R/L
Motors
6
Any
Cable
182.9
(600)
NR NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
NR NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
9.1
(30)
9.1
(30)
9.1
(30)
9.1
(30)
9.1
(30)
9.1
(30)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600))
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
Table 2.F
Maximum Motor Cable Length Restrictions in meters (feet) – 500V-600V Drives
4
91.4
(300)
91.4
(300)
91.4
(300)
91.4
(300)
91.4
(300)
91.4
(300)
w/ 1204-TFB2 Terminator
Motor
A
Any
Cable
NR
B
Any
Cable
182.9
(600)
1600V or
1329R/L
6
Any
Cable
335.3
(1100)
NR
NR
NR
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
335.3
(1100)
335.3
(1100)
335.3
(1100)
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
335.3
(1100)
335.3
(1100)
335.3
(1100)
335.3
(1100)
335.3
(1100)
335.3
(1100)
335.3
(1100)
NR
NR
NR
NR
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
335.3
(1100)
335.3
(1100)
335.3
(1100)
335.3
(1100)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
5
5
5
5
5
5
w/ 1204-TFA1 Terminator
Motor
A
Any
Cable
NR
B
Any
Cable
61.0
(200)
Reactor at Drive
2
Motor
1600V or
1329R/L A
Any
Cable
Any
Cable
182.9
(600)
B
Any
Cable
NR
NR
NR
61.0
(200)
61.0
(200)
61.0
(200)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
Not
NR
NR
NR
NR
61.0
(200)
61.0
(200)
61.0
(200)
61.0
(200)
61.0
(200)
61.0
(200)
61.0
(200)
61.0
(200)
61.0
(200)
61.0
(200)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
NR
61.0
(200)
61.0
(200)
61.0
(200)
61.0
(200)
61.0
(200)
61.0
(200)
61.0
(200)
5
5
5
5
5
5
30.5
(100)
30.5
(100)
61.0
(200)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
91.4
(300)
91.4
(300)
91.4
(300)
1600V or
1329R/L
Any
Cable
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
182.9
(600)
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
NR = Not Recommended
Values shown are for 480V nominal input voltage and drive carrier frequency of 2 kHz. Consult factory regarding operation at carrier frequencies above 2 kHz.
Multiply values by 0.85 for high line conditions. For input voltages of 380, 400 or 415V AC, multiply the table values by 1.25, 1.20 or 1.15, respectively.
A 3% reactor reduces motor and cable stress but may cause a degradation of motor waveform quality. Reactors must have a turn–turn insulation rating of 2100 volts or higher.
Includes wire in conduit.
Values shown are for nominal input voltage and drive carrier frequency of 2 kHz. Consult factory regarding operation at carrier frequencies above 2 kHz. Multiply values by 0.85 for high line conditions.
Information not available at time of printing.
These distances require new 1329R or 1329L motors. New motors at 600V are rated at approximately 1850V insulation value. These distances are only valid with firmware version 4.03 or higher.
These distance restrictions are due to charging of cable capacitance and may vary from application to application. These distances are only valid with firmware version 3.04 or higher.
2–18
Installation/Wiring
Figure 2.2
Terminal Block TB1
A1-A3
Frame
200-240V, 0.37-3.7 kW (0.5-5 HP) Terminal Designations
380-480V, 0.37-3.7 kW (0.5-5 HP) Terminal Designations
A4
Frame
380-480V, 5.5-7.5 kW (7.5-10 HP) Terminal Designations
500-600V, 0.75-3.7 kW (1-5 HP) Terminal Designations
GRD GRD
To Motor
Required
Input Fusing
1
R
(L1)
S
(L2)
T
(L3)
DC
+
DC
–
Dynamic Brake
Option
U
(T1)
V
(T2)
To Motor
W
(T3)
1
Required Branch
Circuit Disconnect
AC Input Line
B1
Frame
200-240V, 5.5 kW (7.5 HP) Terminal Designations
380-480/500-600V, 5.5-11 kW (7.5-15 HP) Terminal Designations
GRD GRD R
(L1)
S
(L2)
T
(L3)
DC
+
DC
–
COM
BRK
2
–
U
(T1)
V
(T2)
W
(T3)
To Motor
Required
Input Fusing
1
DC Input Line
1
Required Branch
Circuit Disconnect
AC Input Line
Dynamic Brake
Important: A brake malfunction will occur if the Dynamic Brake is connected to "DC – COM"
To Motor
B2
Frame
200-240V, 7.5-11 kW (10-15 HP) Terminal Designations
380-480V, 15-22 kW (20-30 HP) Terminal Designations
500-600V, 15 kW (20 HP) Terminal Designations
PE PE DC
+
DC
–
Dynamic Brake
R
(L1)
S
(L2)
T
(L3)
U
(T1)
V
(T2)
W
(T3)
To Motor
1
Required Branch
Circuit Disconnect
AC Input Line
To Motor
Required
1
Input Fusing
200-240V, 15-22 kW (20-30 HP) Terminal Designations
380-480V, 30-45 kW (40-60 HP) Terminal Designations
500-600V, 18.5-45 kW (25-60 HP) Terminal Designations
PE PE
To Motor
DC
+
DC
–
Dynamic Brake
Required
Input Fusing
1
R
(L1)
S
(L2)
1
Required Branch
Circuit Disconnect
T
(L3)
AC Input Line
U
(T1)
V
(T2)
To Motor
W
(T3)
C
Frame
PE
GRD
PE
GRD
To Motor
DC
+
DC
–
Dynamic Brake
Required
Input Fusing
1
R
(L1)
S
(L2)
T
(L3)
1
Required Branch
Circuit Disconnect
AC Input Line
U
(T1)
V
(T2)
To Motor
W
(T3)
1
User supplied.
2
Terminal located separately on Series A Drives.
D
Frame
200-240V, 30-45 kW (40-60 HP) Terminal Designations
380-480V, 45-112 kW (60-150 HP) Terminal Designations
500-600V, 56-112 kW (75-150 HP) Terminal Designations
Installation/Wiring
2–19
R
(L1)
DC +
Brake
DC –
Brake
PE
S
(L2)
T
(L3)
PE TE
U
(T1)
To Motor
V
(T2)
W
(T3)
1
Required Branch
Circuit Disconnect
AC Input Line
To Motor
1
Required
Input Fusing
See Appendix B for detailed Dimensions.
200-240V, 56-75 kW (75-100 HP) Terminal Designations
380-480V, 112-187 kW (150-250 HP) Terminal Designations
500-600V, 112-224 kW (150-300 HP) Terminal Designations
E
Frame
TE +DC
BUS
–DC PE PE R-L1 S-L2
INPUT
T-L3 U-M1 V-M2 W-M3
OUTPUT
See Appendix B for detailed Dimensions.
To Motor
Required
Input Fusing
1 1
Required Branch
Circuit Disconnect
AC Input Line
To Motor
1
User supplied.
2–20
Installation/Wiring
F
Frame
380-480V, 187-336 kW (250-450 HP) Terminal Designations
R-L1
S-L2 T-L3
PE U-M1
V-M2 W-M3
1
Required Branch
Circuit Disconnect
AC Input Line
Input Fusing
(Supplied)
To Motor
typical terminal
G
DC –
Brake
DC +
Brake
Frame
380-480V, 224-448 kW (300-600 HP) Terminal Designations
500-600V, 187-448 kW (250-600 HP) Terminal Designations
DC +
Brake
Required
Input Fusing
1
T
(L3)
S
(L2)
1
Required Branch
Circuit Disconnect
AC Input Line
R
(L1)
DC –
Brake
U
(M1)
V
(M2)
W
(M3)
Brake terminals are located behind the "U" terminal.
Access terminals from side of chassis
To Motor
T
R
S
typical terminal layout
(located at top of drive)
U
(located at bottom of drive)
V
W
1
User supplied.
Control and Signal Wiring
Installation/Wiring
2–21
Terminal Block TB2
TB2 is located at the bottom of the Main Control Board. 0.37-7.5
kW (0.5-10 HP) A Frame drives have 18 positions. Remaining frame sizes from 5.5 kW (7.5 HP) and up have 22 positions. The maximum and minimum wire size accepted by TB2 is 2.1 and 0.30 mm
2
(14 and 22 AWG). Maximum torque for all terminals is 1.36 N-m (12 lb.-in.). Use Copper wire only. See Figures 2.1 and 2.3.
The recommended control signal wire is:
•
Belden 8760 (or equiv.)–0.750 mm
2
(18 AWG), twisted pair, shielded.
•
Belden 8770 (or equiv.)–0.750 mm
2
(18 AWG), 3 conductor, shielded.
•
Belden 9460 (or equiv.)–0.750 mm
2
(18 AWG), twisted pair, shielded.
Control Connections
If the drive control connections are to be linked to an electronic circuit or device, the common or 0V line should, if possible, be grounded at the device (source) end only.
Important:
Signal Common – User speed reference signals are terminated to logic common at TB2, terminal 3 or 4. This puts the negative (or common) side of these signals at earth ground potential. Control schemes must be examined for possible conflicts with this type of grounding scheme.
Shield Termination – TE (True Earth)
The TE terminal block (not available on 0.37-7.5 kW (0.5-10 HP) A
Frame drives) provides a terminating point for signal wiring shields.
Refer to Figures 2.1 and 2.3 for location.
The maximum and minimum wire size accepted by this block is 2.1
and 0.30 mm
2
(14 and 22 AWG). Maximum torque is 1.36 N-m (12 lb.-in.). Use Copper wire Only and always separate control and power cabling.
Cable Routing
If unshielded cable is used, control signal circuits should not run parallel to motor cables or unfiltered supply cables with a spacing less than 0.3 meters (1 foot). Cable tray metal dividers or separate conduit should be used.
Important:
When user installed control and signal wiring with an insulation rating of less than 600V is used, this wiring must be routed inside the drive enclosure such that it is separated from any other wiring and uninsulated live parts.
2–22
Installation/Wiring
Figure 2.3
TB2 Connections
10 Bit
A/D
Only Present on B Frame
& Up Drives
TE TE 1
+5V
10 Bit
A/D
10 Bit
A/D
150
47.5k
1
µ f
75k
1
µ f
Logic
Common
1
µ f
1.4k
Typical
12 Bit
D/A
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
CR1 CR2 CR3 CR3
10 11 12 13 14 15
CR4 CR4 Only Present on B Frame
& Up Drives
16 17 18 A1 A2 to
TE
10k Ohm
– + +
0-10V
4-20mA
–
Pulse
Source
+ +
Contacts Shown in Unpowered State
(or Powered State with Fault/Alarm Present)
Reserved for
Future Use
Analog Out
User Supplied
Analog Device
3
4
1
2
5
6
Refer to the I/O Config group parameters for analog scaling.
Refer to the [Maximum Speed] parameter on page 5–45.
Refer to Chapter 6 for contact description.
Not available if Encoder Feedback option is used.
Minimum Load Impedance:
A Frame drives = 3.5k ohms
B Frame drives & Up = 1.5k ohms.
Recommended load for all frames = 10k ohms.
Maximum Load Impedance:
A Frame drives = 260 ohms
B Frame drives & Up = 315 ohms
Table 2.G
Terminal Block TB2 Specifications
4
5
Terminal Signal
TE
1, 2, 3
True Earth – Shield Termination
External Speed Pot. or Analog Trim Pot. (10k ohm pot. required)
2
6
7, 8
Signal Common
0-10V DC Input
2
4-20mA Input
2
Pulse Input for Frequency Ref.
4
Analog Out ut
1
A Frame Drives
Analog Output
1
B Frame Drives and Up
Input Impedance = 100k ohms
Input Impedance = 250 ohms
Refer to Pulse Input on the following page
Jumper JP2 to select 0-20mA output
Jumper J5 selects output
pins 1-2 = 0-20mA
6
pins 3-4 = 0-10V DC
5
6
5
10, 11 CR1 Programmable Contact
11, 12
13, 14
16, 17
A1, A2
CR2 Programmable Contact
Firmware Versions 4.01 & Up
CR2 Run Contact
Firmware Versions below 4.01
CR3 Programmable Contact
Firmware Versions 4.01 & Up
CR3 Fault & Fault NOT Contact
3
Firmware Versions below 4.01
CR4 Programmable Contact
Firmware Versions 4.01 & Up
CR4 Alarm & Alarm NOT Contact
Firmware Versions below 4.01
Reserved for Future Use
Resistive Rating = 115V AC/30V DC, 5.0A
Installation/Wiring
2–23
Pulse Input
!
ATTENTION: If reverse polarity or voltage levels are maintained above +12V DC, signals may be degraded and component damage may result.
The pulse input signal must be an externally powered square-wave pulse at a 5V TTL logic level. Circuits in the high state must generate a voltage between 4.0 and 5.5V DC at 16 mA. Circuits in the low state must generate a voltage between 0.0 and 0.4V DC.
Maximum input frequency is 125kHz. Scale factor [Pulse/Enc Scale] must be set.
Important:
Pulse inputs (TB2-7, 8) cannot be used if encoder inputs
(TB3, terminals 31-36) are being used.
Control Interface Option –
TB3
The Control Interface Option provides a means of interfacing various signals and commands to the 1336 PLUS by using contact closures.
Six different versions of the option are available:
L4
L4E
Contact Closure Interface
1
Contact Closure Interface
1
with Encoder Feedback Inputs
L5 +24V AC/DC Interface
L5E +24V AC/DC Interface with Encoder Feedback Inputs
L6 115V AC Interface
L6E 115V AC Interface with Encoder Feedback Inputs
1
Uses internal +5V DC supply.
The user inputs are connected to the option board through TB3 (see
Figure 2.1 for location). The L4, L5 and L6 options each have nine control inputs. The function of each input must be selected through programming as explained later in this section. The L4E, L5E and
L6E options are similar to L4, L5 and L6 with the addition of encoder feedback inputs. Refer to Figure 2.6 (a, b & c) for input impedance values.
2–24
Installation/Wiring
Available Inputs
A variety of combinations made up of the following inputs are available.
Input
1 st
/2 nd
Accel/Decel
Auxiliary
Digital Pot Up/Down
Enable
Integrator Reset
(NOT)
Local Control
Description
These inputs allow selection of the accel or decel time used by the drive.
Required for Operation – this input is intended to fault the drive via external devices (i.e. motor thermoswitch, O.L. relays, etc.).
Opening this contact will fault (F02 – Aux Fault) the drive and shut the output off, ignoring the programmed stop mode.
These inputs increase (up) or decrease (down) the drive commanded frequency when MOP (Motor Operated
Potentiometer) is chosen as the frequency command source.
The rate of increase/decrease is programmable.
Required for Operation – opening this input shuts the drive output off, ignoring the programmed stop mode.
Opening this input clamps the process PI integrator value at zero. Closing this input allows the integrator to continue to operate.
Closing this input gives exclusive control of drive logic to the inputs at terminal block TB3. No other devices may issue logic commands (excluding Stop) to the drive.
PI Output
Reverse
Enables or disables the output of the PI regulator.
Available Only with three-wire control – In single source reversing modes, closing this input commands reverse direction and opening this input commands forward direction.
Reverse or Forward In multi-source reversing modes, closing these inputs commands the corresponding direction. If both inputs are open or both are closed, the current direction is maintained.
Run Forward/Reverse Available Only with two-wire control – Closing these inputs issues both a start command and a direction command to the drive. Opening these contacts issues a stop command to the drive.
Speed Select 1, 2, 3 These inputs choose the frequency command source for the drive. See following pages for details.
Start
Stop Type
Issues a Start command for the drive to begin acceleration to commanded frequency.
Closing this input selects the stop mode in [Stop Select 2] as the method of stopping when a stop command is issued. Opening this input selects the stop mode in [Stop Select 1] as the method of stopping.
Stop/Fault Reset Issues a Stop command for the drive to cease output per the programmed stop mode. If the drive has faulted, opening this input resets the fault if [Fault Clear Mode] is enabled.
Installation/Wiring
2–25
The available combinations are shown in Figure 2.5. Programming the [Input Mode] parameter to one of the Input Mode numbers listed, will select that combination of input functions.
Important:
If a Control Interface Option is not installed, the [Input
Mode] parameter must be set to 1 (default) and jumpers must be installed as shown in Figure 2.7. If the drive was shipped from the factory without the option, these jumpers will have been installed.
Important:
The [Input Mode] parameter can be changed at any time, but the change will not affect drive operation until power to the drive has been removed and bus voltage has decayed completely. When changing the [Input
Mode] parameter, it is important to note that the functions of the TB3 inputs will change when power is reapplied to the drive.
The programming options of the Control Interface Option allow the user to select an input combination to meet the needs of a specific installation. Appropriate selection of a combination may be done by using Figure 2.5. First determine the type of start/stop/direction control desired. Then select the remaining control functions available. Record the selected mode number below.
Selected Mode Number:
Figure 2.4 provides the terminal designations for TB3. The maximum and minimum wire size accepted by TB3 is 2.1 and 0.30
mm
2
(14 and 22 AWG). Recommended torque for all terminals is
0.90-1.13 N-m (8-10 lb.-in.). See Figure 2.6 for TB3 interconnection information. Use Copper wire only.
Figure 2.4
TB3 Terminal Designations
Included on L4E, L5E & L6E Only
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
2–26
Installation/Wiring
Speed Select/Frequency Reference
The drive speed command can be obtained from a number of different sources. The source is determined by drive programming and the condition of the Speed Select Inputs on TB3 (or reference select bits of command word if PLC controlled – see Appendix A).
The default source for a command reference (all speed select inputs open) is the selection programmed in [Freq Select 1]. If any of the speed select inputs are closed, the drive will use other parameters as the speed command source. Refer to Table 2.H and the examples that follow.
Table 2.H
Speed Select Input State vs. Frequency Source
Speed Select 3
Open
Open
Speed Select 2
Open
Open
Speed Select 1
Open
Closed
Accessed through [Freq Select 2] parameter
Open
Open
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Closed
Open
Open
Closed
Closed
Open
Closed
Open
Closed
Open
Closed
Frequency Source
[Freq Select 1]
[Freq Select 2]
[Preset Freq 1]
[Preset Freq 2]
[Preset Freq 3]
[Preset Freq 4]
[Preset Freq 5]
[Preset Freq 6]
[Preset Freq 7]
Important:
The final speed command may be affected by the type of modulation selected with [Speed Control], parameter
77. Refer to [Speed Control] in Chapter 5 for further information.
Example 1
Input Mode 2 – Application calls for a local Human Interface
Module (HIM) speed command or remote 4-20mA from a PLC. The drive is programmed as follows:
–
[Freq Select 1] = Adapter 1
–
[Freq Select 2] = 4-20mA
With Speed Select inputs 2 & 3 open and the selector switch set to
“Remote” (Speed Select 1 closed), the drive will follow [Freq Select
2] or 4-20mA. With the switch set to “Local” (Speed Select 1 open) all speed select inputs are open and the drive will follow the local
HIM (Adapter 1) as selected with [Freq Select 1].
26
Remote
27
28
Local
Speed Select 3 (Open)
Speed Select 2 (Open)
Speed Select 1
Installation/Wiring
2–27
Example 2
Input Mode 7 – Application is to follow a local HIM unless a preset speed is selected. The drive is programmed as follows:
–
[Freq Select 1] = Adapter 1
–
[Freq Select 2] = Preset Freq 1
–
[Preset Freq 1] = 10 Hz.
–
[Preset Freq 2] = 20 Hz.
–
[Preset Freq 3] = 30 Hz.
Contact operation for the speed select switch is described in the table below. Since Input Mode 7 does not offer a Speed Select 3 input,
[Preset Freq 4-7] are not available.
Local
1 2
3
See Table
26
27
28
Speed Select 2
Speed Select 1
1
2
Position
Local
Speed Select Input
1 (#28)
Open
2 (#27)
Open
3
Closed
Open
Closed
Open
Closed
Closed
Parameter Used Programmed for Speed Ref.
Setting
[Freq Select 1] Adapter 1
[Freq Select 2]
[Preset Freq 2]
[Preset Freq 3]
Preset Freq 1
20 Hz.
30 Hz.
2–28
Momentary
Maintained
Installation/Wiring
26
27
28
29
30
22
23
24
25
19
20
21
25
28
29
26
27
21
22
23
24
19
20
30
Figure 2.5
Input Mode Selection & Typical TB3 Connections
[Input Mode] 1
Factory Default
Status
Stop/Fault Reset
3
Common
Status
Status
Status
Common
Status
Status
Status
Common
Enable
3
Note: If this mode is selected, the status of all inputs can be read at the [Input Status] parameter.
However, only “Stop/Fault Reset” and “Enable” will have control function.
[Input Mode] 2-6, 17, 18, 22
Three-Wire Control with Single-Source Reversing
Start
Stop/Fault Reset
3
Common
2 3 4
Mode
5 6 17
5
18
5
22
8
Reverse
4
Reverse
4
Reverse
4
Reverse
4
Reverse
4
Jog
7
Stop
Type
2nd
Accel
Digital
Pot Up
Jog
7
Reverse
4
Integrator
Reset
6
Integrator
Reset
6
Jog
7
Jog
7
PI
Output
Auxiliary
3
Common
Speed
Select 3
1
Speed
Select 3
1
Speed Select 2
1
Speed Select 1
Common
Enable
3
1
2nd
Decel
Digital
Pot Dn
Local
Control
2
Integrator
Reset
6
Speed
Select 3
1
Speed
Select 3
1
2
3
4
5
6
See Speed Select Table.
Drive must be stopped to take Local Control. Control by all other adapters is disabled (except Stop).
These inputs must be present before drive will start.
Bit 0 of [Direction Mask] must = 1 to allow TB3 direction change.
Firmware version 3.01 and Up, Only.
Inverted function – voltage resets integrator to zero.
7
See ATTENTION statement on this page.
8
Firmware version 4.01 and Up, Only.
1
Installation/Wiring
2–29
See ATTENTION statement below
!
Momentary
Maintained
28
29
26
27
30
22
23
24
25
19
20
21
25
28
29
26
27
21
22
19
20
23
24
30
[Input Mode] 7-11, 19, 23
Three-Wire Control with Multi-Source Reversing
Start
Stop/Fault Reset
3
Common
7
Reverse
4
8
Reverse
4
Forward
4
Forward
4
9
Mode
10
Digital
Pot Up
Reverse
4
Digital
Pot Dn
Forward
4
11
1st
Accel
2nd
Accel
19
5
23
8
Reverse
4
Reverse
4
Forward
4
Forward
4
Auxiliary
3
Common
Jog
7
Speed
Select 3
1
Speed
Select 3
1
Digital
Pot Up
Speed
Select 2
1
Speed
Select 2
1
Speed
Select 2
1
Digital
Pot Dn
1st
Decel
Integrator
Reset
6
Integrator
Reset
6
2nd
Decel
Speed
Select 2
1
PI
Output
Speed Select 1
1
Common
Enable
3
[Input Mode] 12-16, 20, 21, 24
Two-Wire Control, Single-Source Control
Run Forward/Stop
4
Stop/Fault Reset
3
Common
Run Reverse/Stop
4
12
Local
Control
2
Auxiliary
3
13
Stop
Type
14 15
Mode
16 20
5
2nd
Accel
Digital
Pot Up
Local
Control
2
Local
Control
2
Common
21
Jog
8
7
24
PI
8
Output
Speed
Select 3
1
Speed
Select 3
1
2nd
Decel
Digital
Pot Dn
Stop
Type
Integrator
Reset
6
Speed
Select 3
1
Integrator
Reset
6
Speed Select 2
1
Speed Select 1
1
Common
Enable
3
!
Two wire control uses maintained Run contacts that act as both Run (closed) and Stop (open) devices. Opening the Stop contact (terminal 20) will stop the drive. If this contact is reclosed, any fault will be reset. If a valid Start command is still present, the drive will restart.
If a three wire device (i.e. HIM) is also used, pressing the HIM
Stop key will also stop the drive. Releasing the Stop key will clear any faults that are present, but the drive will not restart without cycling the Start contact.
2–30
Installation/Wiring
Figure 2.6 a
Option L4/L4E Wiring
0.1
µ f 0.1
µ f
Typical
Typical
100
10.7k
10.7k
681
Isolated
+5V
5V
12V
JP4
0.1
µ f
470 470
90.9
Isolated
Ground
IGND
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
A A
ENC
12V
33 34 35 36
ENC
RET
TB3
Contacts shown are general, refer to Figure 2.5 for
Input Mode selection and recommended contact types.
Option L4/L4E – Contact Closure Interface Board Requirements
Contacts must be capable of operating at 10 mA current levels without signal degradation. Reed type input devices are recommended.
The L4/L4E option is compatible with the following Allen-Bradley
PLC
modules:
•
1771-OYL
•
1771-OZL
Installation/Wiring
2–31
Figure 2.6 b
Option L5/L5E Wiring
510
20k
0.22
µ f
510
Typical
510
1k
Typical
100
681
5V
12V
JP4
90.9
A A
ENC
12V
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
ENC
RET
TB3
Common
+24V
User Supplied
24V AC/DC
Contacts shown are general, refer to Figure 2.5 for
Input Mode selection and recommended contact types.
Option L5/L5E – 24V AC/DC Interface Board Requirements
Circuits used with Option L5/L5E must be capable of operating with high = true logic.
DC external circuits in the low state must generate a voltage of no more than 8V DC. Leakage current must be less than 1.5 mA into a
2.5k ohm load.
AC external circuits in the low state must generate a voltage of no more than 10V AC. Leakage current must be less than 2.5 mA into a
2.5k ohm load.
Both AC and DC external circuits in the high state must generate a voltage of +20 to +26 volts and source a current of approximately 10 mA for each input. The L5/L5E option is compatible with these
Allen-Bradley PLC modules:
•
1771-OB
•
1771-OQ16
•
1771-OB16
•
1771-OBD
•
1771-OYL
•
1771-OBN
•
1771-OZL
•
1771-OQ
•
1771-OBB
2–32
Installation/Wiring
Figure 2.6 c
Option L6/L6E Wiring
100
20k
0.22
µ f
0.15
µ f
0.33
µ f
100
Typical
49
Typical
100
499k
681
5V
12V
JP4
90.9
A A
ENC
12V
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
ENC
RET
TB3
Common
Fuse
Fuse
User Supplied
115V AC
115V AC
Contacts shown are general, refer to Figure 2.5 for
Input Mode selection and recommended contact types.
Option L6/L6E – 115V AC Interface Board Requirements
Circuits used with Option L6/L6E must be capable of operating with high = true logic. In the low state, circuits must generate a voltage of no more than 30V AC. Leakage current must be less than 10 mA into a 6.5k ohm load. In the high state, circuits must generate a voltage of
90-115V AC
±
10% and source a current of approximately 20 mA for each input. The L6/L6E option is compatible with these
Allen-Bradley PLC modules:
•
1771-OW
•
1771-OA
•
1771-OWN
•
1771-OAD
Encoder Wiring
Encoders must be line driver type, quadrature or pulse, 5V DC or
8-15V DC output, single-ended or differential and capable of supplying a minimum of 10mA per channel. Maximum input frequency is 125 kHz. Encoder inputs (TB3, terminals 31-36) cannot be used if Pulse Train inputs (TB2-7, 8) are being used.
Installation/Wiring
2–33
The interface board is jumper selectable to accept a 5V TTL or 12V
DC square-wave with a minimum high state voltage of 3.0V DC
(TTL) or 7.0V DC (12 volt encoder). Maximum low state voltage is
0.4V DC. Recommended wire – shielded, 0.750 mm
2
(18 AWG),
305 m (1000 ft.) or less. Maximum input frequency is 125kHz. See
Encoder & Communications Cabling on page 2–9.
Figure 2.6 d
Encoder Signal Wiring
Single-Ended, Dual-Channel
1
31 32 33 34 35 36
TB3
31
Differential
32 33 34 35 36
TB3 to
Power Supply Common
(Terminal 36 or External) to TE to TE
Single-Ended
Encoder Output
Connections
Differential
Encoder Output
Connections
1
For Single-Ended, Single-Channel (pulse) applications, eliminate the B and B (NOT) connections.
Some encoders may label the "A" connection as "Signal."
Important:
Correct direction of motor rotation as determined during start-up (see Chapter 4) may require that the
A or B channel wiring be reversed.
Figure 2.6 e
Encoder Power Wiring
31
Internal
32 33 34 35 36 31
External
32 33 34 35 36
TB3 TB3
+
Common
External
Power
Supply to TE to TE
Encoder Power
Connections using 12V DC Internal
(Drive) Power Source
Minimum On Volts = 7V DC
Minimum Current = 10mA
Encoder Power
Connections using
External DC
Power Source
Minimum On Volts = 3V DC
Minimum Current = 10mA
Important: Control Interface Board jumpers JP3 & JP4 must be set for the voltage level of the encoder output.
2–34
Installation/Wiring
Output Devices
Drive Output Disconnection
!
ATTENTION: Any disconnecting means wired to the drive output terminals U, V and W must be capable of disabling the drive if opened during drive operation.
If opened during drive operation, the drive will continue to produce output voltage between U, V, W.
An auxiliary contact must be used to simultaneously disable the drive.
Common Mode Cores
Common Mode Cores will help reduce the common mode noise at the drive output and guard against interference with other electrical equipment (programmable controllers, sensors, analog circuits, etc.).
In addition, reducing the PWM carrier frequency will reduce the effects and lower the risk of common mode noise interference. Refer to the table below.
Table 2.I
1336 PLUS Common Mode Chokes
Catalog Number
1321-M001
1321-M009
1321-M048
1321-M180
1321-M670
Used with . . .
Communications Cables, Analog
Signal Cables, etc.
All 1336 PLUS Drives Rated:
480V, 0.37-3.7 kW (0.5-5 HP)
All 1336 PLUS Drives Rated:
480V, 5.5-22 kW (7.5-30 HP)
600V, 5.5-30 kW (7.5-40 HP)
All 1336 PLUS Drives Rated:
480V, 30-112 kW (40-X150 HP)
600V, 37-93 kW (50-125 HP)
All 1336 PLUS Drives Rated:
480V, 112-448 kW (150-600 HP)
600V, 149-448 kW (200-600 HP)
Description
Open Style - Signal
Level
Open Style with
Terminal Block, 9A
Open Style, 48A
Open Style, 180A
Open Style, 670A
Cable Termination
Optional Cable Terminator
Voltage doubling at motor terminals, known as reflected wave phenomenon, standing wave or transmission line effect, can occur when using drives with long motor cables.
Inverter duty motors with phase-to-phase insulation ratings of 1200 volts or higher should be used to minimize effects of reflected wave on motor insulation life.
Selecting/Verifying Fan
Voltage
Installation/Wiring
2–35
Applications with non-inverter duty motors or any motor with exceptionally long leads may require an output filter or cable terminator. A filter or terminator will help limit reflection to the motor, to levels which are less than the motor insulation rating.
Table 2.E lists the maximum recommended cable length for unterminated cables, since the voltage doubling phenomenon occurs at different lengths for different drive ratings. If your installation requires longer motor cable lengths, a reactor or cable terminator is recommended. Refer to Table 2.E for frequency, cable length and voltage restrictions of 1204-TFA1 or 1204-TFB2 terminators.
Optional Output Reactor
Bulletin 1321 Reactors listed in the 1336 PLUS-3.0 Price Sheet can be used for drive input and output. These reactors are specifically constructed to accommodate IGBT inverter applications with switching frequencies up to 20 kHz. They have a UL approved dielectric strength of 4000 volts, opposed to a normal rating of 2500 volts. The first two and last two turns of each coil are triple insulated to guard against insulation breakdown resulting from high dv/dt.
When using motor line reactors, it is recommended that the drive
PWM frequency be set to its lowest value to minimize losses in the reactors.
Important:
By using an output reactor the effective motor voltage will be lower because of the voltage drop across the reactor – this may also mean a reduction of motor torque.
1336 PLUS drives, 45 kW (60 HP) and up that have cooling fans utilize a transformer to match the input line voltage to the proper fan voltage. If an input voltage other than the standard 240, 480 or 600V
AC is used, the transformer tap may have to be changed.
!
ATTENTION: To avoid a shock hazard, assure that all power to the drive has been removed before proceeding.
1. Ensure that all power has been removed to the drive.
2. Locate the transformer in the lower left corner of the drive chassis. Note lead placement (tap being used).
3. Determine the correct tap from the following figure and verify.
4. If present tap is incorrect, remove the insulating sleeve from the correct tap.
5. Remove the wire lead presently connected and place on the selected tap. Replace the insulating sleeve on the unused tap.
2–36
Installation/Wiring
200-240V AC Input Voltage
200 Volt Tap
(use for 200-220V)
240 Volt Tap
(use for 230-240V)
Auxiliary Inputs – TB4,
TB6
380-480V AC Input Voltage
380 Volt Tap
(use for 380-400V)
415 Volt Tap
(use for 415V)
460 Volt Tap
(use for 460-480V)
500-600V AC Input Voltage
500 Volt Tap
(use for 500V)
575 Volt Tap
(use for 575-600V)
Terminal blocks TB4 and TB6 (B Frame drives & up) allow the drive power supplies to be operated from an external voltage source.
Both terminal blocks are located on the Base Driver Board and are accessible from the front of the drive. See Figure 2.1 for locations.
TB4 can be used to externally power the low voltage power supply, allowing operation of drive control functions in the absence of bus voltage. Applying proper voltage to TB4 (see Table 2.J) provides
+5V,
±
15V and isolated 12V outputs for:
•
Main Control Board (Control Interface Boards, RIO Board, etc.)
•
SCANport t (HIM, etc.)
•
Encoder(s)
•
ELMS
•
Precharge
•
Any DC fans in the drive
TB6 can be used to externally power the high voltage power supply which provides inverter IGBT drive voltage and the low voltage necessary to power the low voltage power supply. This allows operation of the drive in the absence of bus voltage.
The maximum and minimum wire size accepted by TB4 is 2.1 and
0.06 mm
2
(14 and 30 AWG). Wire sizes for TB6 are 5.3 and 0.06
mm
2
(10 and 30 AWG). Use Copper wire Only with a minimum temperature rating of 75
°
C. Maximum torque for both terminal blocks is 0.57 N-m (5 lb.-in.).
Table 2.J
Power Supply Input Requirements
1
Terminal
Block
TB4
Drive Type
All
230V AC
380-480V AC
500-600V AC
Input Voltage
22-28V DC
2
200-375V DC
3
400-750V DC
3
400-925V DC
3
Average
Current
2.25A
0.50A
0.25A
0.25A
Peak
Current
5.00A
1.00A
0.50A
0.50A
1
The power source used to drive a power supply must be capable of providing the peak current at startup. A “flat“ current or power limit is acceptable, but a foldback current limit may trip at startup, never allowing the supply to start.
2 Must be supplied from a Class 2 Limited Power Source.
3 Must be supplied from a source that is provided with transient voltage surge suppression such that transients are suppressed to 6000V peak maximum or less.
Auxiliary Output – TB9
Interface Board
Installation and Removal
J4
LANGUAGE MODULE
ALLEN-BRADLEY
J7
Installation/Wiring
2–37
The 480 or 600V (depending on input voltage to drive) output terminal block (TB9) is only available on F Frame Drives. This terminal block provides a three-phase, high voltage connection from the load side of the AC input line fuses. Normally this connection is used to power an external control transformer (user supplied) or other auxiliary circuit. Refer to Figure 2.1 for location.
Important:
Depending on the circuitry connected, additional fusing may be required.
!
ATTENTION: The installation of auxiliary circuits must comply with the national codes and standards
(NEC, VDE, BSA, etc.) and local codes regarding wire type, conductor sizes, branch circuit protection and disconnect devices. Failure to do so may result in personal injury and/or equipment damage.
The auxiliary circuit can be utilized to a maximum current capacity of 8 amperes RMS.
The maximum and minimum wire size accepted by TB9 is 4.0 and
0.8 mm
2
(12 and 18 AWG). Use Copper wire Only with a minimum temperature rating of 75
°
C. Maximum torque is 0.90-1.81 N-m
(8-16 lb.-in.).
Important:
If the Control Interface Board is being installed, Main
Control Board jumpers at pins 3 & 4 and 17 & 18 of J4
(J7 on B Frame & up drives) must be removed and the proper [Input Mode] selected. If this board is removed, these jumpers must be reinstalled and the [Input Mode] parameter must be programmed to “1.”
Figure 2.7
Jumper Locations
LANGUAGE MODULE
ALLEN-BRADLEY
ES
C
SE
L
JOG
ES
C
SE
L
JOG
Frames
1
A1 - A4
1
Refer to page 1–1 for frame reference classifications.
Frames
1
B - G
2–38
Installation/Wiring
Adapter Definitions
Serial communication devices such as the Human Interface Module that are connected to the drive are identified by SCANport serial communications as Adapters. Depending on the drive and options ordered, a number of different adapters are available as shown in
Figure 2.8. Figure 2.9 shows the maximum distance allowed between devices.
Figure 2.8
Adapter Locations
1203-SG2
1203-SG4
2 3
2 3 4 5
LANGUAGE M
ALLEN-BRADLEY
ODULE
Control Interface Option
(TB3 Adapter 0)
Internal Communication
(Adapter 6)
LAN
GUAGE MODULE
ALLEN-BRADLEY
Main
Control Board
Expansion Options
2
ES
C
SE
L
JO
G
ES
C
SE
L
JO
G
Main
Control Board
Drive Mounted HIM
(Adapter 1)
Drive Mounted HIM
(Adapter 1)
Frames
1
A1 - A4
Frames
1
B - G
1
2
Refer to page 1–1 for frame reference classifications.
Communications Port for remote HIM/communication options (Adapter 2) or Expansion Options (Adapters 2, 3, 4, 5) is located on the bottom of the enclosure
(bottom of Main Control Board Mounting Plate for frames F-G).
Figure 2.9
Remote Device Distances
ESC SEL
JOG
HIM or Other
Remote Device
SCANport
RIO
Comm
Status
120/240V AC
Input
Communication Module
ESC SEL
JOG
Adapter 2
Total cable distance between each device and drive must be 10 meters (33 feet) or less.
Cable Length in
Meters = 10 – X
Cable Length in
Meters = 10 – X
Length = X Meters
Port Expansion
Option
(1203-SG2)
or
Maximum Cable
Length = 10 Meters
ESC SEL
JOG
HIM or Other
Remote Device
HIM Description
Chapter
3
Human Interface Module
Chapter 3 describes the various controls and indicators found on the optional Human Interface Module (HIM). The material presented in this chapter must be understood to perform the start-up procedure in
Chapter 4.
When the drive mounted HIM is supplied, it will be connected as
Adapter 1 (see Adapter Definitions in Chapter 2) and visible from the front of the drive. The HIM can be divided into two sections;
Display Panel and Control Panel. The Display Panel provides a means of programming the drive and viewing the various operating parameters. The Control Panel allows different drive functions to be controlled. Refer to Figure 3.1 and the sections that follow for a description of the panels.
!
ATTENTION: When a drive mounted HIM is not supplied on enclosed NEMA Type 1 (IP 20) drives, the blank cover plate (option HAB) must be installed to close the opening in the front cover of the enclosure.
Failure to install the blank cover plate allows access to electrically live parts which may result in personal injury and/or equipment damage.
When a drive mounted HIM is supplied with enclosed
NEMA Type 1 (IP 20) drives, but has been removed from its mounting cradle for remote operation, the blank cover plate must be installed in place of the HIM.
Important:
The operation of some HIM functions will depend upon drive parameter settings. The default parameter values allow full HIM functionality.
Figure 3.1
Human Interface Module
Display Panel
Control Panel
Human Interface Module
(HIM)
3–2
Human Interface Module
Figure 3.2
HIM Display Panel
LCD Display
Display Panel Key Descriptions
Escape
When pressed, the ESCape key will cause the programming system to go back one level in the menu tree.
Select
Pressing the SELect key alternately causes the top or bottom line of the display to become active. The flashing first character indicates which line is active.
Increment/Decrement
These keys are used to increment and decrement a value or scroll through different groups or parameters. Pressing both keys simultaneously while the Process or Password
Display is shown, will save that display as the startup display.
Enter
When pressed, a group or parameter will be selected or a parameter value will be entered into memory. After a parameter has been entered into memory, the top line of the display will automatically become active, allowing another parameter (or group) to be chosen.
Figure 3.3
HIM Control Panel
Human Interface Module
3–3
Digital Speed
Control and
Indicator
(also available with Analog
Speed Pot.)
Control Panel Key Descriptions
Start
The Start key will initiate drive operation if no other control devices are sending a Stop command. This key can be disabled by the [Logic Mask] or [Start Mask].
Stop
If the drive is running, pressing the Stop key will cause the drive to stop, using the selected stop mode. Refer to the [Stop Select 1] and [Stop Select 2] parameters in
Chapter 5.
If the drive has stopped due to a fault, pressing this key will clear the fault and reset the drive. Refer to the
[Flt Clear Mode], [Logic Mask] and [Fault Mask] parameters.
Jog
When pressed, jog will be initiated at the frequency set by the [Jog Frequency] parameter, if no other control devices are sending a Stop command. Releasing the key will cause the drive to stop, using the selected stop mode.
Refer to [Stop Select 1], [Stop Select 2], [Logic Mask] and [Jog Mask].
3–4
Human Interface Module
Control Panel Key Descriptions
(Continued)
Change Direction
Pressing this key will cause the drive to ramp down to zero Hertz and then ramp up to set speed in the opposite direction. The appropriate Direction Indicator will illuminate to indicate the direction of motor rotation.
Refer to [Logic Mask] and [Direction Mask].
Direction LEDs (Indicators)
The appropriate LED will illuminate continuously to indicate the commanded direction of rotation. If the second LED is flashing, the drive has been commanded to change direction, but is still decelerating.
Up/Down Arrows
(only available with digital speed control)
Pressing these keys will increase or decrease the HIM frequency command. An indication of this command will be shown on the visual Speed Indicator. The drive will run at this command if the HIM is the selected frequency reference. See [Freq Select 1] and [Freq Select 2].
Pressing both keys simultaneously stores the current
HIM frequency command in HIM memory. Cycling power or removing the HIM from the drive will set the frequency command to the value stored in HIM memory.
If the Analog Speed Potentiometer option has been ordered, the Up/Down keys and Speed Indicator will be replaced by the pot.
Speed Indicator
(only available with digital speed control)
Illuminates in steps to give an approximate visual indication of the commanded speed.
If the Analog Speed Potentiometer option has been ordered, the Up/Down keys and Speed Indicator will be replaced by the pot.
HIM Operation
When power is first applied to the drive, the HIM will cycle through a series of displays. These displays will show drive name, HIM ID number and communication status. Upon completion, the Status
Display (see Figure 3.4) will be shown. This display shows the current status of the drive (i.e. “Stopped,” “Running,” etc.) or any faults that may be present (refer to Chapter 6 for fault information). On a Series
A (version 3.0) or Series B HIM (see back of HIM) the Status Display can be replaced by the Process Display or Password Login menu. See appropriate sections on the following pages for more information.
Human Interface Module
3–5
Figure 3.4
Status Display
From this display, pressing any one of the 5 Display Panel keys will cause “Choose Mode” to be displayed. Pressing the Increment or
Decrement keys will allow different modes to be selected as described below and shown in Figure 3.5. Refer to the pages that follow for operation examples.
Display
When selected, the Display mode allows any of the parameters to be viewed. However, parameter modifications are not allowed.
Process
The Process mode displays two user-selected parameters with text and scaling programmed by the user. Refer to Chapter 5 for further information.
Program
Program mode provides access to the complete listing of parameters available for programming. Refer to Chapter 5 for further parameter programming information.
EEProm
This mode allows all parameters to be reset to the factory default settings. In addition, a Series B HIM will allow parameter upload/download between the HIM and drive.
Search (Series A, version 3.0 or Series B HIM Only)
This mode will search for parameters that are not at their default values.
Control Status (Series A, version 3.0 or Series B HIM Only)
Permits the drive logic mask to be disabled/enabled allowing HIM removal while drive power is applied. Disabling the logic mask with a
Series A HIM below version 3.0 can be accomplished with [Logic
Mask] as explained on page 3–15. This menu also provides access to a fault queue which will list the last four faults that have occurred. “Trip” displayed with a fault indicates the actual fault that tripped the drive. A clear function clears the queue – it will not clear an active fault.
Password
The Password mode protects the drive parameters against programming changes by unauthorized personnel. When a password has been assigned, access to the Program/EEProm modes and the Control
Logic/Clear Fault Queue menus can only be gained when the correct password has been entered. The password can be any five digit number between 00000 and 65535. Refer to the example on page 3–13.
3–6
Human Interface Module
Figure 3.5
HIM Programming Steps
Power-Up &
Status Display
ESC
or
SEL
or or or
"Choose Mode"
OPERATOR LEVEL
MODE LEVEL
Display
(Read Only)
Process Program
(Read/Write)
EEPROM Search
1
(Read Only)
Control
Status
1
Password
Process Display
Parameter Groups
(See Chapter 5)
Parameters
(See Chapter 5)
1
Series A (Version 3.0) and Series B HIM Only.
2
Series B HIM Only.
3
Reserved for Future Use.
Reset Defaults
Drive -> HIM 2
HIM -> Drive 2
Recall Values 3
Save Values 3
Control Logic,
Fault Queue
Login, Logout
Modify
GROUP LEVEL
PARAMETER LEVEL
Human Interface Module
Program and Display Modes
1. The Display and Program modes allow access to the parameters for viewing or programming.
or
A. From the Status Display, press Enter
(or any key). “Choose Mode” will be shown.
B. Press the Increment (or Decrement) key to show “Program” (or “Display”).
C. Press Enter.
or or
Bit ENUMs
or
D. Press the Increment (or Decrement) key until the desired group is displayed.
E. Press Enter.
F. Press the Increment (or Decrement) key to scroll to the desired parameter.
With drive software versions above 2.00
and a Series A (software version 3.0) or
Series B HIM, bit ENUMs (16 character text strings) will be displayed to aid interpretation of bit parameters.
G. Select a bit parameter with the Increment (or Decrement) keys.
H. Press the SELect key to view the
ENUM of the first bit. Pressing this key again will move the cursor to the left one bit.
A blinking underline cursor will indicate that you are in the Display mode or that a Read Only parameter as been accessed. A flashing character will indicate that the value can be changed.
Individual bits of a Read/Write parameter can be changed in the same manner.
Pressing the SELect key will move the cursor (flashing character) one bit to the left. That bit can then be be changed by pressing the Increment/Decrement keys.
When the cursor is in the far right position, pressing the Increment/Decrement keys will increment or decrement the entire value.
Choose Mode
Display
Choose Mode
Program
Choose Group
Metering
Output Current
0.00 Amps
Masks
Logic Mask
TB3
X1111111
3–7
3–8
or or or or and
Human Interface Module
Process Mode
or or
1. When selected, the Process mode will show a custom display consisting of information programmed with the Process
Display group of parameters.
A. Follow steps A-C on the preceding page to access the Program mode.
B. Press the Increment/Decrement key until “Process Display” is shown.
Press Enter.
C. Using the Increment/Decrement keys, select [Process 1 Par] and enter the number of the parameter you wish to monitor. Press Enter.
D. Select [Process 1 Scale] using the
Increment/Decrement keys. Enter the desired scaling factor. Press Enter.
E. Select [Process 1 Txt 1] using the
Increment/Decrement keys. Enter the desired text character. Press Enter and repeat for the remaining characters.
F. If desired, a second display line can also be programmed by repeating steps
A-E for [Process 2 xxx] parameters.
G. When process programming is complete, press ESCape until “Choose
Mode” is displayed. Press Increment/
Decrement until “Process” is displayed.
H. Press Enter. This selects which custom display will be on line 1 and line 2.
Use the Increment/Decrement keys to select process 1 or 2 parameters for line 1.
I. Press SELect to move to line 2. Select the desired process parameters. With a
Series A (version 3.0) or a Series B
HIM, a zero can be entered to disable line 2. In addition, the Process Display can be set to appear when drive power is applied by simultaneously pressing the Increment and Decrement keys while the Process Display active.
Choose Mode
Program
Choose Group
Process Display
Process 1 Par
1
Process 1 Scale
1.00
Process 1 Txt 1
V
Choose Mode
Process
Process Var 1=1
Process Var 2=2
Sets Process Display as Power-Up Display
EEProm Mode
Reset Defaults
or or
Drive –> HIM
or or
Human Interface Module
The EEProm mode is used to restore all settings to factory default values or upload/ download parameters between the HIM and drive (Series B HIM, Only).
1. To restore factory defaults:
A. From the Status Display, press Enter
(or any key). “Choose Mode” will be displayed.
B. Press the Increment (or Decrement) key until “EEProm” is displayed. If
EEProm is not in the menu, programming is password protected. Refer to
Password Mode later in this section.
C. Press Enter.
D. Press the Increment (or Decrement) key until “Reset Defaults” is displayed.
E. Press Enter to restore all parameters to their original factory settings.
F. Press ESC. “Reprogram Fault” will display.
G. Press the Stop key to reset the fault.
Important: If [Input Mode] was previously set to a value other than “1,” cycle drive power to reset.
2. To upload a parameter profile from the drive to the HIM, you must have a Series
B HIM.
A. From the EEProm menu (see steps
A-C above), press the Increment/
Decrement keys until “Drive –> HIM” is displayed.
B. Press Enter. A profile name (up to 14 characters) will be displayed on line 2 of the HIM. This name can be changed or a new name entered. Use the SEL key to move the cursor left. The
Increment/Decrement keys will change the character.
Choose Mode
Display
Choose Mode
EEProm
EEProm
Reset Defaults
Reprogram Fault
F 48
Stopped
+0.00 Hz
EEProm
Drive –> HIM
Drive –> HIM
1 A
3–9
3–10
Human Interface Module
Drive –> HIM
(continued)
HIM –> Drive
or or
C. Press Enter. An informational display will be shown, indicating the drive type and firmware version.
D. Press Enter to start the upload. The parameter number currently being uploaded will be displayed on line 1 of the HIM. Line 2 will indicate total progress. Press ESC to stop the upload.
E. “COMPLETE” displayed on line 2 will indicate a successful upload. Press
Enter. If “ERROR” is displayed, see
Chapter 6.
3. To download a parameter profile from the
HIM to a drive, you must have a Series B
HIM.
Important: The download function will only be available when there is a valid profile stored in the HIM.
A. From the EEProm menu (see steps
1A-1C), press the Increment/Decrement keys until “HIM –> Drive” is displayed.
B. Press the Enter key. A profile name will be displayed on line 2 of the HIM.
Pressing the Increment/Decrement keys will scroll the display to a second profile (if available).
C. Once the desired profile name is displayed, press the Enter key. An informational display will be shown, indicating the version numbers of the profile and drive.
D. Press Enter to start the download. The parameter number currently being downloaded will be displayed on line 1 of the HIM. Line 2 will indicate total progress. Press ESC to stop the download.
E. A successful download will be indicated by “COMPLETE” displayed on line 2 of the HIM. Press Enter. If
“ERROR” is displayed, see Chapter 6.
Master Type
Version 2.01
Drive –> HIM 60
|||||
Drive –> HIM 210
COMPLETE
EEprom
HIM –> Drive
HIM –> Drive
1 A
Master Type
2.01 –> 2.03
HIM –> Drive 60
|||||
Drive –> HIM 210
COMPLETE
Human Interface Module
Control Status Mode
or or
Search Mode
or or or
1. The Search Mode is only available with a
Series A (version 3.0) or Series B HIM.
This mode allows you to search through the parameter list and display all parameters that are not at the factory default values.
A. From the Status Display, press Enter
(or any key). “Choose Mode” will be shown.
B. Press the Increment (or Decrement) key until “Search” is displayed.
C. Press Enter. The HIM will search through all parameters and display any parameters that are not at their factory default values.
D. Press the Increment (or Decrement) key to scroll through the list.
1. The Control Status mode is only available with a Series A (version 3.0) or Series B
HIM.
This mode allows the drive logic mask to be disabled, thus preventing a Serial Fault when the HIM is removed with drive power applied. The logic mask can be disabled with Series A HIM versions below 3.0 by using [Logic Mask] as explained on page 3–15.
A. From the Status Display, press Enter
(or any key). “Choose Mode” will be shown.
B. Press the Increment (or Decrement) key until “Control Status” is displayed.
Press Enter.
C. Select “Control Logic” using the
Increment/Decrement keys. Press
Enter.
D. Press the SELect key, then use the
Increment (or Decrement) key to select
“Disabled” (or “Enable”).
E. Press Enter. The logic mask is now disabled (or enabled).
Choose Mode
Display
Choose Mode
Search
Choose Mode
Display
Choose Mode
Control Status
Control Status
Control Logic
Control Logic
Disabled
3–11
3–12
Human Interface Module
Control Status Mode
(continued)
Fault Queue/Clear Faults
2. This menu provides a means to view the fault queue and clear it when desired.
or
A. From the Control Status menu, press the Increment (or Decrement) key until
“Fault Queue” is displayed.
B. Press Enter.
or or or
C. Press the Increment (or Decrement) key until “View Faults” is displayed.
D. Press Enter. The fault queue will be displayed. “Trip” displayed with a fault will indicate the fault that tripped the drive.
E. Use the Increment (or Decrement) key to scroll through the list.
F. To clear the fault queue, press ESCape.
Then use the Increment/Decrement keys to select “Clear Queue.” Press
Enter. Please note that “Clear Queue” will not clear active faults.
Control Status
Fault Queue
Fault Queue
View Faults
Serial Fault
F 10 Trip 1
Reprogram Fault
F 48 2
Fault Queue
Clear Queue
Password Mode
or or or or and
Human Interface Module
1. The factory default password is 0 (which disables password protection). To change the password and enable password protection, perform the following steps.
A. From the Status Display, press Enter
(or any key). “Choose Mode” will be shown.
B. Press the Increment (or Decrement) key until “Password” is displayed.
C. Press Enter.
D. Press the Increment (or Decrement) key until “Modify” is displayed.
E. Press Enter. “Enter Password” will be displayed.
F. Press the Increment (or Decrement) key to scroll to your desired new password. With a Series A (version
3.0) or Series B HIM, the SELect key will move the cursor.
G. Press Enter to save your new password.
H. Press Enter again to return to the
Password Mode.
I. Press the Increment (or Decrement) key until “Logout” is displayed.
J. Press Enter to log out of the Password mode.
K. With a Series A (version 3.0) or Series
B HIM, the Password mode can be programmed to appear when drive power is applied. Simultaneously press the Increment and Decrement keys while the Password display is shown.
Choose Mode
Display
Choose Mode
Password
Password
Modify
Enter Password
< 0>
Enter Password
< 123>
Choose Mode
Password
Password
Login
Password
Logout
Choose Mode
Password
Sets Password Display as Power-Up Display
3–13
3–14
Human Interface Module
Password Mode
(continued)
Login to the Drive
or
2. The Program/EEProm modes and the
Control Logic/Clear Queue menus are now password protected and will not appear in the menu. To access these modes, perform the following steps.
A. Press the Increment (or Decrement) key until “Password” is displayed.
B. Press Enter. “Login” will be displayed.
or
C. Press Enter, “Enter Password” will be displayed.
D. Press the Increment (or Decrement) key until your correct password is displayed. With a Series A (version
3.0) or Series B HIM, the SELect key will move the cursor.
E. Press Enter.
Logout from the Drive
or or
F. The Program and EEProm modes will now be accessible. To prevent future access to program changes, logout as described in step 1.
3. To prevent unauthorized changes to parameters, Logout must be performed as described below.
A. Press the Increment (or Decrement) key until “Password” is displayed.
B. Press Enter.
C. Press the Increment (or Decrement) key until “Logout” is displayed.
D. Press Enter to log out of the Password mode.
Choose Mode
Password
Password
Login
Enter Password
< 0>
Enter Password
< 123>
Choose Mode
Password
Choose Mode
Password
Password
Login
Password
Logout
Choose Mode
Password
Module Removal
Human Interface Module
3–15
For handheld operation, the module can be removed and located up to 10 meters (33 feet) from the drive. Refer to Adapter Definitions in
Chapter 2 for details.
!
ATTENTION: Some voltages present behind the drive front cover are at incoming line potential. To avoid an electric shock hazard, use extreme caution when removing/replacing the HIM.
Important:
Removing a HIM (or other SCANport device) from a drive while power is applied will cause a “Serial Fault,” unless the [Logic Mask] parameter has been set to disable this fault or Control Logic (Control Status menu) has been disabled (Series A, version 3.0 or
Series B HIM). Setting Bit 1 of the [Logic Mask] parameter to “0” will disable “Serial Fault” from a HIM on port 1. Note that this also disables all HIM control functions except Stop.
To remove the module:
1. Assure that power has been removed, [Logic Mask] has been set or Control Logic has been disabled.
2. Take the drive front cover off and simply slide the module down and out of its cradle. Remove cable from module.
3. Connect the appropriate cable between the HIM and the
Communications Port (Adapter 2, 3, 4 or 5).
4. Reverse the above steps to replace the module. Apply power, reset Bit 1 of the [Logic Mask] or enable Control Logic.
3–16
Human Interface Module
End of Chapter
Start-Up Procedure
Chapter
4
StartĆUp
This chapter describes how you start-up the 1336 PLUS Drive.
Included are typical adjustments and checks to assure proper operation. The information contained in previous chapters of this manual must be read and understood before proceeding.
Important:
The 1336 PLUS is designed so that start-up is simple and efficient. The programmable parameters are grouped logically so that most start-ups can be accomplished by adjusting parameters in only one group. Advanced features and adjustments are grouped separately. This eliminates having to constantly step through unneeded parameters on initial start-up.
This start-up procedure covers only the most commonly adjusted values.
The following start-up procedure is written for users who have a
Human Interface Module (HIM) installed and who are not using a
2-wire drive control scheme. For users without a HIM, respective external commands and signals must be substituted to simulate their operation.
!
ATTENTION: Power must be applied to the drive to perform the following start-up procedure. Some of the voltages present are at incoming line potential. To avoid electric shock hazard or damage to equipment, only qualified service personnel should perform the following procedure. Thoroughly read and understand the procedure before beginning. If an event does not occur while performing this procedure, Do Not
Proceed. Remove Power by opening the branch circuit disconnect device and correct the malfunction before continuing.
Important:
•
Power must be applied to the drive when viewing or changing
1336 PLUS parameters. Previous programming may affect the drive status when power is applied.
•
If the Control Interface option is installed, remote start circuits may be connected to TB3 on the interface board. Confirm that all circuits are in a de-energized state before applying power. User supplied voltages may exist at TB3 even when power is not applied to the drive.
•
Refer to Chapter 6 for fault code information.
4–2
Start-Up
Initial Operation – Motor Disconnected
1. Verify that AC line power at the disconnect device is within the rated value of the drive. If a Control Interface option (L4, L5, L6,
L4E, L5E, L6E) is installed, verify that the control power to this board matches the board rating.
2. Remove and lock-out all incoming power to the drive including incoming AC power to terminals R, S and T (L1, L2 and L3) plus any separate control power for remote interface devices. Remove the drive cover and disconnect the motor leads from TB1, terminals U, V, W (T1, T2 and T3).
3. If a Control Interface option is installed, verify that the Stop and
Enable interlock inputs are present. If an [Input Mode] other than
“1” is to be used, verify that the Auxiliary interlock input is present.
Important:
The Stop and Enable inputs (and Auxiliary if required) must be present before the drive will start.
If this option is not installed, verify that two jumpers are installed at pins 3 & 4 and 17 & 18 of J4 on A Frame drives or J7 on B
Frame and up drives. In addition, the [Input Mode] must be set to
“1.”
4. Confirm that all other optional inputs are connected to the correct terminals and are secure.
5. The remainder of this procedure requires that a HIM be installed.
If the HIM has a Control Panel, use the local controls to complete the start-up procedure. If a Control Panel is not present, remote devices must be used to operate the drive.
6. Replace the drive cover and tighten the thumbscrew(s).
Start-Up
Apply Power
Reset Factory Defaults
or or
7. Apply AC power and control voltages to the drive. The LCD Display should light and display a drive status of “Stopped” and an output frequency of “+0.00 Hz.”
If the drive detects a fault, a brief statement relating to the fault will be shown on the display. Record this information, remove all power and correct the fault source before proceeding. Refer to Chapter
6 for fault descriptions.
8. Important: The remaining steps in this procedure are based on factory default parameter settings. If the drive has been previously operated, parameter settings may have been changed and may not be compatible with this start-up procedure or application. Drive status and fault conditions may be unpredictable when power is first applied.
To obtain proper results, the parameters must be restored to factory default settings.
A. From the Status Display, press Enter
(or any key). “Choose Mode” will be displayed.
B. Press the Increment (or Decrement) key until “EEPROM” is displayed. If
EEProm is not in the menu, programming is password protected.
Refer to Chapter 3 for Password information.
C. Press Enter.
D. Press the Increment (or Decrement) key until “Reset Defaults” is displayed.
E. Press Enter to restore all parameters to their original factory settings.
F. Press ESC. “Reprogram Fault” will display.
G. Press the Stop key to reset the fault.
Important: If [Input Mode] was previously set to a value other than “1,” cycle drive power to reset.
Stopped
+0.00 Hz
Choose Mode
Display
Choose Mode
EEProm
EEProm
Reset Defaults
Choose Mode
EEProm
Reprogram Fault
F 48
Stopped
+0.00 Hz
4–3
4–4
Start-Up
Program Input Mode
or
Cycle Input Power
9. If a Control Interface option is installed, it is important that the Input Mode recorded in Chapter 2 be programmed into the drive.
Since the control inputs to this option are programmable, incorrect operation can occur if an improper mode is selected. The factory default input mode disables all inputs except Stop and Enable. Verify your control scheme against the information provided in Chapter 2 and program the
[Input Mode] parameter as follows:
A. From the Status Display, press the
Enter key (or any key). “Choose
Mode” will be displayed.
B. Press the Increment (or Decrement) key until “Program” is displayed. If
Program is not available, programming is password protected. Refer to
Chapter 3 for Password mode information.
C. Press Enter.
D. Press the Increment key until “Setup” is displayed.
E. Press Enter.
F. Press SELect. The first character of line 2 will now flash.
G. Press the Increment or Decrement keys until the correct mode is displayed, then press Enter. The first character of line 1 will now flash.
H. Press the ESCape key (3 times) to return to the Status Display.
I. Remove power to the drive. When the
HIM Display is no longer illuminated, reapply power.
Important: Display must go blank for programming change to take affect.
Choose Mode
EEProm
Choose Mode
Program
Metering
Setup
Input Mode
1
Input Mode
1
Input Mode
2
Stopped
+0.00 Hz
Start-Up
10. Set [Maximum Freq] and [Maximum
Voltage] parameters to correct values
(typically line voltage/frequency). Set
[Base Voltage] and [Base Frequency] parameters to the motor nameplate values.
A. From the Status Display, press the
Enter key (or any key). “Choose
Mode” will be displayed.
B. Press the Increment (or Decrement) key until “Program” is displayed.
C. Press Enter.
or or
Choose
Sensorless Vector or V/Hz
D. Press the Increment key until “Setup” is displayed.
E. Press Enter.
F. Press the Increment or Decrement keys until “Maximum Freq” is displayed.
Press SELect. The first character of line 2 will now flash.
G. Use the Increment/Decrement keys to display the first digit, then press Enter.
Repeat for remaining digits.
H. Repeat the above steps to program the remaining parameters. In firmware versions 4.01 & up, the remaining parameters are located in the Motor
Control group.
I. Press the ESCape key (3 times) to return to the Status Display.
11. Sensorless Vector or V/Hz operation.
Firmware Version 4.01 & Up Only
Sensorless Vector or Volts/Hertz operation is selectable via [Control Select]. Vector operation is the default. If V/Hz operation is desired, reprogram [Control Select] using the steps above as a programming guide. Refer to page 5–51.
Choose Mode
EEProm
Choose Mode
Program
Metering
Setup
Input Mode
1
Maximum Freq
60
Stopped
+0.00 Hz
4–5
4–6
Start-Up
or or
12. Setting Frequency Command.
A. From the Status Display, press the
Enter key (or any key). “Choose
Mode” will be displayed.
B. Press the Increment key until
“Display” is shown.
C. Press Enter.
D. Press the Decrement key until
“Metering” is displayed.
E. Press Enter.
F. Press the Increment key until “Freq
Command” is displayed.
G. If the frequency command is a value other than zero, use the speed source
(digital, analog pot, etc.) to set the command to zero.
H. After the command has been set to zero, press the ESCape key until the
Status Display is shown.
13. Verifying Minimum and Maximum
Frequency Settings.
A. Press the Start key. The drive should output zero Hz. which is the factory default value for the [Minimum Freq] parameter. The Status Display should indicate “At Speed” and the actual frequency (+0.00 Hz.).
If the drive does not start, check bit 12
(Voltage Check) of the [Drive Alarm] parameter. If the bit is “1,” the drive terminal voltage is preventing the drive from starting. Normally this is caused by IGBT leakage current. To bypass this alarm, program [Flying Start En] to
“Track Volts,” then start the drive.
B. With the drive still running, use the speed source to command maximum speed. The drive should ramp to
[Maximum Freq].
Choose Mode
Program
Choose Mode
Display
Setup
Metering
Output Voltage
0 Vlts
Freq Command
+0.00 Hz
Stopped
+0.00 Hz
At Speed
+0.00 Hz
Accelerating
+29.62 Hz
At Speed
+60.00 Hz
Start-Up
Open Enable Signal
Restore Enable Signal
Open Auxiliary Signal
Restore Auxiliary Signal
14. Checking Direction.
A. Initiate a Reverse command.
Important: With [Direction Mask] set to the default value, the reverse command must be issued from the HIM or other adapter. If the reverse command is to be issued from
TB3, [Direction Mask] must first be programmed to allow direction control from TB3.
The drive will ramp to zero speed, then ramp to [Maximum Freq] in the opposite direction. The output frequency shown on the Display Panel will indicate speed with a “+” for forward or a “–” for reverse. As the drive decelerates, the Forward Direction LED will flash, indicating actual direction. During this time the Reverse
Direction LED will illuminate continuously, indicating the commanded direction.
Once zero Hertz is reached and the drive begins to accelerate in the reverse direction, the Forward LED will extinguish and the Reverse LED will illuminate continuously.
15. If the Control Interface option is not installed, stop the drive and go to step 16.
The following steps will check for correct drive operation when the Enable and
Auxiliary inputs are removed.
A. With the drive still running, open the
Enable signal. The drive should stop and indicate “Not Enabled” on the display. Restore the Enable signal.
B. If [Input Mode] is set to “1,” go to step 16.
C. With the drive running, open the
Auxiliary signal. The drive should stop and the display will indicate
“Auxiliary Fault.” Restore the
Auxiliary signal and reset the drive by pressing the Stop key.
At Speed
–60.00 Hz
Not Enabled
–0.00 Hz
Auxiliary Fault
F 2
Stopped
–0.00 Hz
4–7
4–8
Start-Up
Press & Hold Jog Key
Release Jog Key
Set to Maximum Frequency
16. Jog Control & Stop Mode Check.
A. With the drive reset, but not running, press and hold the Jog key on the Control Panel. The motor should accelerate to the frequency programmed by the
[Jog Frequency] parameter and remain there until the Jog key is released.
When released, the drive should execute a stop function using the programmed stop mode. Verify that the correct stop mode was initiated.
17. Checking Accel and Decel Times.
A. Verify that the frequency command is at maximum frequency.
B. Start the drive and observe the amount of time the drive takes to accelerate to maximum frequency. This should equal 10 seconds, which is the factory default value for the [Accel Time 1] parameter.
C. Press the Reverse key and observe the amount of time the drive takes to decelerate from maximum frequency to zero. This time should equal the time set in the [Decel Time 1] parameter (default is 10 seconds). If these times are not correct for your application, refer to Chapter 5 for instructions on programming changes.
Important: With [Direction Mask] set to the default value, the reverse command must be issued from the HIM or other adapter. If the reverse command is to be issued from
TB3, [Direction Mask] must first be programmed to allow direction control from TB3.
D. Stop the drive.
Remove ALL Power
18. Reconnect the Motor.
A. Remove and lock-out the input and control power to the drive. When the
HIM Display is no longer illuminated, remove the drive cover.
At Speed
–10.00 Hz
Stopped
–0.00 Hz
Stopped
+0.00 Hz
Start-Up
4–9
Reconnect Motor
Apply Power to Drive
Verify Frequency Command = 0
Verify Forward Rotation
Slowly Increase Speed
or
Verify Direction of Rotation
!
ATTENTION: To avoid a hazard of electric shock, verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged. Measure the DC bus voltage at the + & – terminals of
TB1. The voltage must be zero.
B. Reconnect motor leads & replace cover.
19. Check for Correct Motor Rotation.
!
ATTENTION: In the following steps, rotation of the motor in an undesired direction can occur. To guard against possible equipment damage, it is recommended that the motor be disconnected from the load before proceeding.
A. Reapply power to the drive.
B. Verify that the frequency command is at zero Hz. For further information, refer to step 12.
C. Using the Direction LEDs, verify that forward direction is selected.
D. Start the drive and slowly increase the speed until the motor begins to turn.
Note the direction of motor rotation. If the direction of rotation is as desired, proceed to Step E.
If the direction of motor rotation is incorrect, stop the drive and remove all power. When the HIM Display is no longer illuminated, remove the drive cover. Verify that the bus voltage measured at “DC +” & “DC –” of TB1 is zero (see Attention above).
Interchange any two of the three motor leads at TB1 – U, V or W. Repeat Steps
A through D.
E. If encoder feedback is being used, verify that the polarity (“+” or “–”) of
[Pulse/Enc Hertz] equals the polarity of the actual drive output as shown on the Status Display. If the polarities are the same, go to step F.
If polarities are different, stop the drive, remove all power. Reverse the
“A” & “A NOT” OR “B” & “B NOT” wiring. Repeat Steps A through D.
F. Stop the drive and replace drive cover.
Polarity
4–10
Start-Up
Set Slip @ F.L.A. Value
or
20. Low Speed Operation.
(Speed range greater than 20:1)
If Volts/Hertz operation was selected in step 11, proceed to step 25.
Slip @ F.L.A. Adjustment.
To increase the steady state torque performance of the motor at low speeds, the default Speed Control method is Slip
Compensation. The factory default value for [Slip @ F.L.A.] is “1.0 Hz.” Optimum motor performance depends on accurate setting of [Slip @ F.L.A.].
Estimate your motor slip value using the following:
Motor Sync. RPM – Motor Rated RPM
Motor Sync. RPM x Motor Rated Freq. (Hz)
Example:
1800 – 1778
1800 x 60 = 0.7 Hz Slip @ F.L.A.
This will provide a starting point for slip compensation adjustment. If necessary, further adjustment can be made while the motor is under load.
A. From the Status Display, press the
Enter key (or any key). “Choose
Mode” will be displayed.
B. Press the Increment (or Decrement) key until “Program” is displayed.
C. Press Enter.
D. Press the Increment key until “Feature
Select” is displayed.
E. Press Enter.
F. Press the Increment or Decrement keys until “Slip @ F.L.A.” is displayed.
Press SELect. The first character of line 2 will now flash.
G. Use the Increment/Decrement keys to program the value calculated above, then press Enter.
Choose Mode
EEProm
Choose Mode
Program
Metering
Feature Select
Dwell Frequency
Slip @ F.L.A.
Slip @ F.L.A.
0.7 Hz
Start-Up
4–11
Speed Control Selection
Program NP Data
Remove ALL Power to the Drive
Disconnect Load
Apply Power to Drive
or
No
Control
Slip
Comp.
Speed
Droop
Phase Lock
Loop *
Encoder
Feedback
Droop +
Regulator
P
Jump
Process
PI
[Speed Control]
Parameter 77
* Firmware versions below 4.01 only.
21. Tuning Sensorless Vector operation.
Firmware Version 4.01 & Up Only
To further improve drive performance in
Sensorless Vector mode, the actual motor nameplate data can be entered directly.
Refer to the motor nameplate and program the following Setup group parameters:
[Motor NP Amps]
[Motor NP Volts]
[Motor NP Hertz]
[Motor NP RPM].
For the typical steps involved when programming, refer to step 20.
22. Optimum tuning requires motor rotation and can be achieved by running the drive/motor under a “no-load” condition.
Speed
Adder
Speed
Reference
see page 2–26
A. Remove all power to the drive.
Disconnect the load from the system by decoupling the motor shaft.
Reapply drive power.
B. While monitoring [Freq Command] in the Metering group, adjust the speed source for the drive (digital, analog pot, etc.) to 45 Hz.
continued
+
+
∑
Frequency Command
Freq Command
45 Hz
4–12
Start-Up
or or or
Adjusting Flux Up Time
Tuning [Slip Comp Gain]
C. Press the Increment/Decrement keys until “Flux Current” is displayed. Start the drive and record this value. Stop the drive.
Flux Current
1 Amp
Flux Current =
D. Press the Increment/Decrement keys to display “Freq Command.” Adjust the speed source for the drive to zero Hz.
Freq Command
0 Hz
E. Press the Increment (or Decrement) key to display “Output Voltage.” Start the drive and record the value.
F. Stop the drive.
G. Program the values recorded above into the following parameters.
[Flux Amps Ref] = [Flux Current] at 45 Hz.
[IR Drop Volts] = [Output Voltage] at zero Hz.
Important: Some motors (i.e. 6 pole, special, etc.) may be particularly sensitive to the adjustment of [IR Drop Volts]. If this tuning procedure does not give the desired performance, adjust [IR Drop Volts] up/down, 1 or 2 volts until desired response is achieved.
23. On larger motors (37 kW/50 HP, typical) additional acceleration performance can be gained by adjusting [Flux Up Time]. This parameter determines the amount of time that the drive will inject current at [Current
Limit] levels before acceleration begins.
This pre-acceleration time builds flux in the motor to allow for optimum acceleration, and may result in shorter overall acceleration. If better performance is required, adjust [Flux Up Time]. Begin with 0.2 seconds (default is zero) and increase as necessary.
For the typical steps involved when programming, refer to step 20.
24. To adjust the recovery response to load changes [Slip Comp Gain] can be increased. However, increasing the gain value too high may cause system instability. The factory default value is set to minimum. Fine adjustment will require operation with a load.
Output Voltage
0 Vlts
Output Voltage at 0 Hz =
Slip Comp Gain
1
Amps volts
Set Power-Up Display
or
Set Electronic Overload
25. With HIM software versions 2.02 & up, the power-up display (Status, Process or
Password) can be programmed to appear when drive power is applied. Simply access the desired display and simultaneously press the Increment and
Decrement keys.
26. Electronic overload protection is factory set to drive maximum.
A. To properly set the electronic overload protection, program [Overload Amps]
(Setup group) to the actual nameplate
F.L.A.
B. If the motor speed range is greater than
2:1, program [Overload Mode] to the proper derate.
For the typical steps involved when programming, refer to step 20.
27. This completes the basic start-up procedure. Depending on your application, further parameter programming may be required. Refer to Chapter 5 for information.
28. If password protection is enabled, log out as described in Chapter 3.
Start-Up
4–13
4–14
Start-Up
End of Chapter
Function Index
Programming Flow Chart
Chapter
5
Programming
Chapter 5 describes parameter information for the 1336 PLUS. Parameters are divided into 14 groups for ease of programming and operator access. Grouping replaces a sequentially numbered parameter list with functional parameter groups that increases operator efficiency and helps to reduce programming time. For most applications, this means simplicity at startup with minimum drive tuning.
The Function Index shown below provides a directory of the parameters required for each drive function. The Page Number locates within a group all parameters associated with that specific function.
Function
Analog Input Config
Auto Restart
Custom Volts-per-Hertz
DC Brake-to-Stop
DC Hold Brake
Dwell
Economize
Electronic Shear Pin
Encoder Feedback
Fault Buffer History
Frequency Select
I/O Configuration
Last Speed
Line Loss Recovery
Minimum/Maximum Frequency
Overload Protection
Preset Frequencies
Process Control
Process Display
Remote I/O
S-Curve Acceleration
Skip Frequencies
Slip Compensation
Stop Modes
Traverse Function
5–45
5–29
5–19
5–26
5–19
5–24
5–11
5–12
5–19
5–47
5–44
5–43
5–23
5–20
5–22
5–16
5–25
Page Number
5–15
5–22
5–51
5–17
5–17
5–21
5–51
5–29
The flow charts provided on pages 5–2 through 5–5 highlight the steps required to access each group of parameters and lists all parameters for each group.
Important:
Series A (Version 3.0) and Series B HIM software versions (see back of HIM) provide several new functions, including; Search, Control Status and Bit ENUMs. Refer to Chapter 3 for a description of these functions.
5–2
Programming
OPERATOR LEVEL
MODE LEVEL
Display
(Read Only)
GROUP LEVEL
Wraps to Linear List
Parameter Groups
Power-Up Mode &
Status Display
ESC
or
SEL
or or or
"Choose Mode"
Process
Process Display
Program
(Read and Write)
Parameter Groups
Metering Setup
page 5-7 page 5-10
Output Current
Output Voltage
Output Power
DC Bus Voltage
Output Freq
Freq Command
4-20 mA Hertz
0-10 Volt Hertz
Pot Hertz
Pulse/Enc Hertz
MOP Hertz
Heatsink Temp
Power OL Count
Motor OL Count
Last Fault
Torque Current
Flux Current
% Output Power
% Output Curr
Input Mode
Freq Select 1
Accel Time 1
Decel Time 1
Minimum Freq
Maximum Freq
Stop Select 1
Current Limit
Current Lmt Sel
Adaptive I Lim
Overload Mode
Overload Amps
VT Scaling
Motor NP RPM
Motor NP Hertz
Motor NP Volts
Motor NP Amps
Advanced
Setup page 5-14
Minimum Freq
Maximum Freq
PWM Frequency
Analog Trim En
4-20mA Loss Sel
Accel Time 2
Decel Time 2
Stop Select 1
DC Hold Time
DC Hold Level
Hold Level Sel
Bus Limit En
Motor Type
Stop Select 2
KP Amps
Frequency
Set page 5-19
Freq Select 1
Freq Select 2
Jog Frequency
Preset Freq 1
Preset Freq 2
Preset Freq 3
Preset Freq 4
Preset Freq 5
Preset Freq 6
Preset Freq 7
Skip Freq 1
Skip Freq 2
Skip Freq 3
Skip Freq Band
MOP Increment
Save MOP Ref
Freq Ref SqRoot
Pulse/Enc Scale
Feature
Select page 5-21
Dwell Frequency
Dwell Time
Speed Control
Slip @ F.L.A.
Slip Comp Gain
Run On Power Up
Reset/Run Tries
Reset/Run Time
S Curve Enable
S Curve Time
Language
Flying Start En
FStart Forward
FStart Reverse
LLoss Restart
Traverse Period
Max Traverse
P Jump
I/O
Config page 5-26
Input Mode
CR1 Out Select
CR2 Out Select
CR3 Out Select
CR4 Out Select
Dig Out Freq
Dig Out Current
Dig Out Torque
Set 0-10 Vlt Lo
Set 0-10 Vlt Hi
Set 4-20 mA Lo
Set 4-20 mA Hi
Analog Out Sel
Anlg Out Offset
Abs Analog Out
Set Anlg Out Lo
Set Anlg Out Hi
Faults
Diagnostics page 5-29
Fault Buffer 0
Fault Buffer 1
Fault Buffer 2
Fault Buffer 3
Clear Fault
Cur Lim Trip En
Shear Pin Fault
Motor OL Fault
Line Loss Fault
Blwn Fuse Flt
Low Bus Fault
Fault Data
Flt Motor Mode
Flt Power Mode
Fault Frequency
Flt Driv Status
Fault Alarms
Flt Clear Mode
Ground Warning
page 5-34
Drive Status
2nd Drive Sts
Drive Alarm
Latched Alarms
Input Status
Freq Source
Freq Command
Drive Direction
Stop Mode Used
Motor Mode
Power Mode
Output Pulses
Current Angle
Heatsink Temp
Set Defaults
DC Bus Memory
EEPROM Cksum
PARAMETER LEVEL
Programming
5–3
FIRMWARE VERSIONS 4.01 & UP
EEPROM
Series A (Version 3.0) and Series B HIM Only
Search
(Read Only)
Series A (Version 3.0) and Series B HIM Only
Control Status Password
Reset Defaults
Drive -> HIM
1
HIM -> Drive
1
Recall Values
2
Save Values
2
1
Series B HIM Only
.
2
Reserved for Future Use
Control Logic
Fault Queue
Login, Logout,
Modify
Wraps to Linear List and Metering
Ratings page 5-38
Drive Type
Firmware Ver.
Drive Rtd Volts
Rated Amps
Rated kW
Rated CT Amps
Rated CT kW
Rated VT Amps
Rated VT kW
Masks page 5-39
Direction Mask
Start Mask
Jog Mask
Reference Mask
Accel Mask
Decel Mask
Fault Mask
MOP Mask
Logic Mask
Local Mask
Alarm Mask
Owners page 5-41
Stop Owner
Direction Owner
Start Owner
Jog Owner
Reference Owner
Accel Owner
Decel Owner
Fault Owner
MOP Owner
Local Owner
page 5-43
Data In A1
Data In A2
Data In B1
Data In B2
Data In C1
Data In C2
Data In D1
Data In D2
Data Out A1
Data Out A2
Data Out B1
Data Out B2
Data Out C1
Data Out C2
Data Out D1
Data Out D2
Adapter I/O
Process
Display page 5-44
Process 1 Par
Process 1 Scale
Process 1 Txt 1
Process 1 Txt 2
Process 1 Txt 3
Process 1 Txt 4
Process 1 Txt 5
Process 1 Txt 6
Process 1 Txt 7
Process 1 Txt 8
Process 2 Par
Process 2 Scale
Process 2 Txt 1
Process 2 Txt 2
Process 2 Txt 3
Process 2 Txt 4
Process 2 Txt 5
Process 2 Txt 6
Process 2 Txt 7
Process 2 Txt 8
Encoder
Feedback page 5-45
Speed Control
Encoder Type
Pulse/Enc Scale
Maximum Speed
Motor Poles
Speed KI
Speed Error
Speed Integral
Speed Adder
Motor NP RPM
Motor NP Hertz
Pulse/Enc Hertz
Process PI
Motor
Control page 5-47 page 5-51
Speed Control
PI Config
PI Status
PI Ref Select
PI Fdbk Select
PI Reference
PI Feedback
PI Error
PI Output
KI Process
KP Process
PI Neg Limit
PI Pos Limit
PI Preload
Control Select
Flux Amps Ref
IR Drop Volts
Flux Up Time
Start Boost
Run Boost
Boost Slope
Break Voltage
Break Frequency
Base Voltage
Base Frequency
Maximum Voltage
Note: Parameters that appear in more than one group are shown in Bold
5–4
Programming
OPERATOR LEVEL
MODE LEVEL
Display
(Read Only)
GROUP LEVEL
Wraps to Linear List
Parameter Groups
Power-Up Mode &
Status Display
ESC
or
SEL
or or or
"Choose Mode"
Process
Process Display
Program
(Read and Write)
Parameter Groups
Metering Setup
Advanced
Setup
Frequency
Set
page 5-7 page 5-10 page 5-14 page 5-19
Output Current
Output Voltage
Output Power
DC Bus Voltage
Output Freq
Freq Command
4-20 mA Hertz
0-10 Volt Hertz
Pot Hertz
Pulse/Enc Hertz
MOP Hertz
Heatsink Temp
Last Fault
Torque Current
Flux Current
% Output Power
% Output Curr
Input Mode
Freq Select 1
Accel Time 1
Decel Time 1
Base Frequency
Base Voltage
Maximum Voltage
Minimum Freq
Maximum Freq
Stop Select 1
Current Limit
Overload Mode
Overload Amps
VT Scaling
PARAMETER LEVEL
Minimum Freq
Maximum Freq
Base Frequency
Base Voltage
Break Frequency
Break Voltage
Maximum Voltage
DC Boost Select
Start Boost
Run Boost
Run/Accel Boost
2.01
PWM Frequency
Analog Invert
Analog Trim En
4-20mA Loss Sel
Accel Time 2
Decel Time 2
Stop Select 1
DC Hold Time
DC Hold Level
Bus Limit En
Motor Type
Stop Select 2
Ki Amps
2.03
Kp Amps
2.03
Freq Select 1
Freq Select 2
Jog Frequency
Preset Freq 1
Preset Freq 2
Preset Freq 3
Preset Freq 4
Preset Freq 5
Preset Freq 6
Preset Freq 7
Skip Freq 1
Skip Freq 2
Skip Freq 3
Skip Freq Band
MOP Increment
Pulse/Enc Scale
Feature
Select page 5-21
Dwell Frequency
Dwell Time
Slip @ F.L.A.
Run On Power Up
Reset/Run Tries
Reset/Run Time
S Curve Enable
S Curve Time
Language
Speed Control
Flying Start En
FStart Forward
FStart Reverse
Traverse Period
Max Traverse
P Jump
Output
Config page 5-26
Digital Out Sel
Dig Out Freq
Dig Out Current
Dig Out Torque
Analog Out Sel
Anlg Out Offset
Faults
Diagnostics page 5-29 page 5-34
Fault Buffer 0
Fault Buffer 1
Fault Buffer 2
Fault Buffer 3
Clear Fault
Cur Lim Trip En
Line Loss Fault
Blwn Fuse Flt
Low Bus Fault
Flt Motor Mode
Flt Power Mode
Fault Frequency
Flt Driv Status
Fault Alarms
Flt Clear Mode
Ground Warning
2.01
Drive Status
Drive Alarm
Latched Alarms
2.01
Input Status
Freq Source
Freq Command
Drive Direction
Stop Mode Used
Motor Mode
Power Mode
Output Pulses
Current Angle
Heatsink Temp
Set Defaults
DC Bus Memory
2.03
Programming
5–5
FIRMWARE VERSIONS 1.05 – 3.01
EEPROM
Series A (Version 3.0) and Series B HIM Only
Search
(Read Only)
Series A (Version 3.0) and Series B HIM Only
Control Status Password
Reset Defaults
Drive -> HIM
1
HIM -> Drive
1
Recall Values
2
Save Values
2
1
Series B HIM Only
.
2
Reserved for Future Use
Control Logic
Fault Queue
Login, Logout,
Modify
Wraps to Metering
Ratings
2.01
Masks Owners Adapter I/O
Process
Display page 5-38 page 5-39 page 5-41 page 5-43 page 5-44
Drive Type ➀
Firmware Ver. ➀
Drive Rtd Volts ➀
Rated Amps ➀
Rated kW ➀
Rated CT Amps ➀
Rated CT kW ➀
Rated VT Amps ➀
Rated VT kW ➀
Direction Mask
Start Mask
Jog Mask
Reference Mask
Accel Mask
Decel Mask
Fault Mask
MOP Mask
Logic Mask
Local Mask
Alarm Mask
2.01
Stop Owner
Direction Owner
Start Owner
Jog Owner
Reference Owner
Accel Owner
Decel Owner
Fault Owner
MOP Owner
Local Owner
Data In A1
Data In A2
Data In B1
Data In B2
Data In C1
Data In C2
Data In D1
Data In D2
Data Out A1
Data Out A2
Data Out B1
Data Out B2
Data Out C1
Data Out C2
Data Out D1
Data Out D2
Process 1 Par
Process 1 Scale
Process 1 Txt 1
Process 1 Txt 2
Process 1 Txt 3
Process 1 Txt 4
Process 1 Txt 5
Process 1 Txt 6
Process 1 Txt 7
Process 1 Txt 8
Process 2 Par
Process 2 Scale
Process 2 Txt 1
Process 2 Txt 2
Process 2 Txt 3
Process 2 Txt 4
Process 2 Txt 5
2.01
Firmware version 2.01 or later.
2.03
Firmware version 2.03 or later.
3.01
Firmware version 3.01 or later.
➀
Located in the "Diagnostics" group for firmware versions before 2.01.
Process 2 Txt 6
Process 2 Txt 7
Process 2 Txt 8
Note: Parameters that appear in more than one group are shown in Bold
Encoder
Feedback
Process PI
3.01
page 5-45 page 5-47
Speed Control
Encoder Type
Pulse/Enc Scale
Maximum Speed
Motor Poles
Speed KI
Speed Error
Speed Integral
Speed Adder
Motor NP RPM
Motor NP Hertz
Pulse/Enc Hertz
2.01
PI Config
PI Ref Select
PI Fdbk Select
PI Reference
PI Feedback
PI Error
PI Output
Ki Process
Kp Process
PI Neg Limit
PI Pos Limit
Linear List
5–6
Programming
Chapter Conventions
[Parameter Name]
Parameter description.
[Parameter Name]
Parameter description.
Parameter descriptions adhere to the following conventions.
1. All parameters required for any given drive function will be contained within a group, eliminating the need to change groups to complete a function.
2. All parameters are documented as either having ENUMS or
Engineering Units.
ENUMS
Parameter Number
➀
Parameter Type
Factory Default
➁
➂
Units
#
Read Only or Read/Write
Drive Factory Setting
Display / Drive
ENUM Text / Internal Drive Units
➃ / ➄
Engineering Units
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
➀
➁
Display Units / Drive Units
➃, ➄
Factory Default
➂
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
➅
➆
#
Read Only or Read/Write
User Units / Internal Drive Units
Drive Factory Setting
Min Value Acceptable
Max Value Acceptable
➀ Parameter Number
Each parameter is assigned a number. The number can be used for process display setup, fault buffer interpretation or serial communication.
➁ Parameter Type
2 types of parameters are available:
Read Only
The value is changed only by the drive and is
Read/Write
used to monitor values.
The value is changed through programming. This type can also be used to monitor a value.
➂ Factory Default
➃ Display Units
This is the value assigned to each parameter at the factory.
The units that appear on the HIM display. 2 types exist:
ENUMS
A language statement pertaining to the selection made or language description of bit function.
Engineering
Standard units such as; Hz, sec, volts, etc.
➄ Drive Units
These are internal units used to communicate through the serial port, and to scale values properly when reading or writing to the drive.
➅ Minimum Value
This is the lowest setting possible for parameters that do not use
ENUMS.
➆ Maximum Value
This is the highest setting possible for parameters that do not use
ENUMS.
3. To help differentiate parameter names and display text from other text in this manual, the following conventions will be used:
•
Parameter Names will appear in [brackets]
•
Display Text will appear in “quotes”.
Programming
5–7
Metering
This group of parameters consists of commonly viewed drive operating conditions such as motor speed, drive output voltage, current and command frequency. All parameters in this group are Read Only and can only be viewed.
[Output Current]
This parameter displays the output current present at TB1, terminals T1, T2 & T3 (U, V & W).
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
54
Read Only
0.1 Amp / 4096 = Rated Amps
None
0.0
Maximum Value 200% Rated Drive Output Current
[Output Voltage]
This parameter displays the output voltage present at TB1, terminals T1, T2 & T3 (U, V & W).
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
1
Read Only
1 Volt / 4096 = Drive Rtd Volts
None
Minimum Value 0
Maximum Value 200% Rated Drive Output Voltage
[Output Power]
This parameter displays the output power present at
TB1, terminals T1, T2 & T3 (U, V & W).
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
23
Read Only
1 kilowatt / 4096 = Drive Rated kW
None
Minimum Value –200% Rated Drive Output Power
Maximum Value +200% Rated Drive Output Power
[DC Bus Voltage]
This parameter displays the DC bus voltage level.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
53
Read Only
1 Volt / 4096 = Drive Rtd Volts
None
0
200% DC Bus Voltage Max
[Output Freq]
This parameter displays the output frequency present at TB1, terminals T1, T2 & T3 (U, V & W).
[Freq Command]
This parameter displays the frequency that the drive is commanded to output. This command may come from any one of the frequency sources selected by
[Freq Select 1] or [Freq Select 2].
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
66
Read Only
0.01 Hertz / 32767 = Maximum Freq Forward
None
–400.00 Hz
+ 400.00 Hz
65
Read Only
0.01 Hertz / 32767 = Maximum Freq Forward
None
–400.00 Hz
+ 400.00 Hz
5–8
Programming
Metering
[4-20 mA Hertz]
This parameter displays the frequency command present at analog current input terminals 4 & 6 of
TB2. This value is displayed whether or not this is the active frequency command.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
[0-10 Volt Hertz]
This parameter displays the frequency command present at analog voltage input terminals 4 & 5 of
TB2. This value is displayed whether or not this is the active frequency command.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
[Pot Hertz]
This parameter displays the frequency command present at remote pot terminals 1, 2 & 3 of TB2.
This value is displayed whether or not this is the active frequency command.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
[Pulse/Enc Hertz]
This parameter displays the frequency command present at pulse input terminals 7 & 8 of TB2 or at the encoder input terminals on TB3 (if present). This value is displayed whether or not this is the active frequency command.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
[MOP Hertz]
This parameter displays the frequency command from the MOP. The MOP frequency command can be adjusted by TB3 (if present) and an appropriate
[Input Mode] is selected (see Input Mode Selection figure in Chapter 2). Some SCANport adapters, including the RIO Adapter, can also adjust the MOP frequency command. This value is displayed whether or not this is the active frequency command.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
[Heatsink Temp]
This parameter displays the heatsink temperature.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
140
Read Only
0.01 Hertz / 32767 = Maximum Freq
None
0.00 Hz
400.00 Hz
139
Read Only
0.01 Hertz / 32767 = Maximum Freq
None
0.00 Hz
400.00 Hz
138
Read Only
0.01 Hertz / 32767 = Maximum Freq
None
0.00 Hz
400.00 Hz
63
Read Only
0.01 Hertz / 32767 = Maximum Freq
None
0.00 Hz
400.00 Hz
137
Read Only
0.01 Hertz / 32767 = Maximum Freq
None
0.00 Hz
400.00 Hz
70
Read Only
1
°
C / Deg. C
None
0
255
°
C
Programming
Metering
[Power OL Count]– Firmware 4.01 & later
Displays the percentage of accumulated I
2 t for the drive thermal overload protection. Running continuously above 115% of drive rated amps will accumulate a value of 100% and generate an
Overtemp Fault (F08).
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
[Motor OL Count]– Firmware 4.01 & later
This parameter displays the percentage of accumulated I
2 t for the motor overload protection.
Running continuously at programmed [Overload
Amps] will accumulate approximately 70%.
Reduction of load will reduce the OL count. 100% value will generate an Overload Fault (F07).
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
84
Read Only
1 % / 4096 = 100%
None
0%
200%
202
Read Only
1 % / 4096 = 100%
None
0%
200%
[Last Fault]
This parameter displays the last drive fault. It is updated whenever a new fault occurs.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
[Torque Current]
This parameter displays the amount of current that is in phase with the fundamental voltage component.
It is the current that is actually producing torque.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
[Flux Current]
This parameter displays the amount of current that is out of phase with the fundamental voltage component. It is the current required to maintain motor flux.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
4
Read Only
Fault Number / Fault Number
None
None
None
162
Read Only
0.1 Amp / 4096 = Rated Amps (Motoring)
None
–200% Drive Rating
+200% Drive Rating
163
Read Only
0.1 Amp / 4096 = Rated Amps (Motoring)
None
–200% Drive Rating
+200% Drive Rating
[% Output Power]
This parameter displays the % output power of the drive.
Parameter Number 3
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Read Only
1 % /
±
4096 =
±
100%
None
Minimum Value –200% Drive Rated Output Power
Maximum Value +200% Drive Rated Output Power
[% Output Curr]
This parameter displays the % output current of the drive.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
2
Read Only
1 % / 4096 = 100%
Factory Default
Minimum Value
None
0%
Maximum Value 200% Rated Drive Output Current
5–9
5–10
Programming
Setup
[Input Mode]
This parameter selects the functions of inputs 1-8 at
TB3 when an optional interface card is installed.
Refer to Input Mode Selection figure in Chapter 2.
This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running. Power to the drive must be cycled before any changes will affect drive operation.
This group of parameters defines basic operation and should be programmed before initial use of the drive. For advanced programming and information on specific parameters, refer to the flow chart on pages 5–2 & 5–3.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
21
Read and Write
Mode Number / Selection
1
1
24
[Freq Select 1]
This parameter controls which of the frequency sources is currently supplying the
[Freq Command] to the drive unless
[Freq Select 2] or [Preset Freq 1-7] is selected.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
5
Read and Write
“Adapter 1”
Display Drive
“Adapter 1” 6
“Adapter 2” 7
“Adapter 3” 8
“Adapter 4” 9
“Adapter 5” 10
“Adapter 6” 11
“Preset 1-7” 12-18
“Use Last” 0
“Remote Pot” 1
“0-10 Volt” 2
“4-20 mA” 3
“Pulse Ref” 4
Refer to [Pulse/Enc Scale] Scale Value
“MOP” 5
[Accel Time 1]
This value determines the time it will take the drive to ramp from 0 Hz to [Maximum Freq]. The rate determined by this value and [Maximum Freq] is linear unless [S Curve Enable] is “Enabled.” It applies to any increase in command frequency unless [Accel Time 2] is selected.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
7
Read and Write
0.1 Second / Seconds x 10 (x 100 frn < 4.01)
10.0 Sec
0.0 Sec
3600.0 Sec (600.0 frn < 4.01)
Important: Please note the resolution and Maximum Value changes with Frn 4.01.
[Decel Time 1]
This value determines the time it will take the drive to ramp from [Maximum Freq] to 0 Hz. The rate determined by this value and [Maximum Freq] is linear unless [S Curve Enable] is “Enabled.” It applies to any decrease in command frequency unless [Decel Time 2] is selected.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
8
Read and Write
0.1 Second / Seconds x 10 (x 100 frn < 4.01)
10.0 Sec
0.0 Sec
3600.0 Sec (600.0 frn < 4.01)
Important: Please note the resolution and Maximum Value changes with Frn 4.01.
[Base Frequency]
[Base Voltage]
[Maximum Voltage]
These parameters were moved to the “Motor Control” group in firmware version 4.01.
Refer to page 5–53 for parameter descriptions.
Programming
5–11
Setup
Accel/Decel Time
Constant Speed
Speed
Ac ce le ra tio n
De ce le ra tio n
0
0
Accel Time
Time
Decel Time
[Minimum Freq]
This parameter sets the lowest frequency the drive will output.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
16
Read and Write
1 Hertz / Hertz x 10 (x 1 frn < 4.01)
0 Hz
0 Hz
120 Hz
Important: Please note the resolution change with Frn 4.01.
[Maximum Freq]
This parameter sets the highest frequency the drive will output.
This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
19
Read and Write
1 Hertz / Hertz x 10 (x 1 frn < 4.01)
60 Hz
25 Hz
400 Hz
Important: Please note the resolution change with Frn 4.01.
[Stop Select 1]
This parameter selects the stopping mode when the drive receives a valid stop command unless
[Stop Select 2] is selected.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
10
Read and Write
“Coast”
Display Drive
“Coast” 0
Causes the drive to turn off immediately.
“DC Brake” 1
Injects DC braking voltage into the motor.
Requires a value in both [DC Hold Time]
& [DC Hold Level].
“Ramp” 2
Drive decelerates to 0 Hz., then if [DC
Hold Time] & [DC Hold Level] are greater than zero the holding brake is applied. If the values equal zero, then the drive turns off. Requires a value in [Decel Time
1] or [Decel Time 2].
“S Curve” 3
Drive causes S Curve Ramp to 0 Hz in
[Decel Time 1] or [Decel Time 2] x 2.
“Ramp to Hold” 4
Drive decelerates to zero Hertz then injects holding brake per [DC Hold Level]
(limited to 70% of drive rated amps) until a) a Start command is issued or b) the
Enable input is opened.
[Current Limit]
This parameter sets the maximum drive output current that is allowed before current limiting occurs.
Parameter Number 36
Parameter Type Read and Write
Display Units / Drive Units 1% of Max Drive Output Current / 4096 = 100%
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
150%
20% of [Rated Amps]
160% of [Rated Amps]
5–12
Programming
Setup
[Current Lmt Sel]– Firmware 4.01 & later
Selects the source of the [Current Limit] setting for the drive. When an external input is selected (0-10V or 4-20 mA), the minimum signal (0V or 4 mA) sets
20% current limit and the maximum signal (10V or
20mA) sets the value programmed in [Current Limit].
This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
[Adaptive I Lim] – Firmware 4.01 & later
When ENABLED, this parameter maintains normal current limit control to provide normal acceleration into medium to high system inertia.
When DISABLED, this parameter applies a feed forward command to acceleration, allowing quicker accel times from stopped to commanded speed with low system inertia
.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
[Overload Mode]
This parameter selects the derating factor for the I
2
T electronic overload function. Motors designed to operate with wider speed ranges need less overload derating.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
232
Read and Write
“Current Lmt”
Display Drive
“Current Lmt” 0
Use [Current Limit], param. 36.
“0-10 Volt” 1
Adjustable through 10V input, TB2,
4 & 5.
“4-20 mA” 2
Adjustable through 4-20mA input,
TB2, 4 & 6.
227
Read and Write
“Enabled”
Display Drive
“Disabled” 0
“Enabled” 1
Overload Patterns
No Derate
100
80
60
40
20
0
Min Derate
100
80
60
40
20
0
Max Derate
100
80
60
40
20
0
0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200
% of Base Speed
1000
Time to Trip vs. Current (Firmware 4.01 & Up)
100
10
Cold
Hot
1
1
115%
Multiple of [Overload Amps]
10
37
Read and Write
“No Derate” (“Max Derate” frn < 4.01)
Display Drive
“Max Derate” 2
2:1 Speed Range Derate below
50% of Base Speed
“Min Derate” 1
4:1 Speed Range. Derate below
25% of Base Speed
“No Derate” 0
10:1 Speed Range. No Derating
Programming
Setup
[Overload Amps]
This value should be set to the motor nameplate Full
Load Amps (FLA) for 1.15 SF motors. For 1.0 SF motors the value should be set to 0.9 x nameplate
FLA.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
38
Read and Write
0.1 Amps / 4096 = Rated Amps
115% of Drive Rating
20% of Drive Rated Amps
115% of Drive Rated Amps
[VT Scaling]
This parameter scales the drive for VT ampere ratings.
This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
5–13
203
Read and Write
“Disabled”
Display Drive
“Disabled” 0
Disables Variable Torque Scaling
“Enabled” 1
Enables Variable Torque Scaling
[Motor NP RPM]
This value should be set to the motor nameplate rated RPM.
This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
177
Read and Write
1 RPM / 1 RPM
1750 RPM
60 RPM
24000 RPM
[Motor NP Hertz]
This value should be set to the motor nameplate rated frequency.
This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
178
Read and Write
1 Hertz / Hertz x 10 (x 1 frn < 4.01)
60 Hz
1 Hz
400 Hz
[Motor NP Volts]– Firmware 4.01 & later
This value should be set to the motor nameplate rated volts.
This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
190
Read and Write
1 Volt / 4096 = Drive Rated Volts
Drive Rated Volts
0 Volts
2 x Drive Rated Volts
[Motor NP Amps]– Firmware 4.01 & later
This value should be set to the motor nameplate rated current.
This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
191
Read and Write
1 Amp / 4096 = Drive Rated Amps
Drive Rated Amps
0 Amps
2 x Drive Rated Amps
5–14
Programming
Advanced
Setup
This group contains parameters that are required to setup advanced functions of the drive for complex applications.
[Minimum Freq]
This parameter sets the lowest frequency the drive will output.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
16
Read and Write
1 Hertz / Hertz x 10 (x 1 frn < 4.01)
0 Hz
0 Hz
120 Hz
Important: Please note the resolution change with Frn 4.01.
[Maximum Freq]
This parameter sets the highest frequency the drive will output.
This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
19
Read and Write
1 Hertz / Hertz x 10 (x 1 frn < 4.01)
60 Hz
25 Hz
400 Hz
Important: Please note the resolution change with Frn 4.01.
[Base Frequency]
[Base Voltage]
[Break Frequency]
[Break Voltage]
[Maximum Voltage]
These parameters were moved to the “Motor Control” group in firmware version 4.01.
Refer to pages 5–52 and 5–53 for parameter descriptions.
[DC Boost Select] – Firmware below 4.01
This parameter sets the level of DC Boost that will be applied at low frequencies (typically 0-7 Hz).
Auto settings automatically measure motor resistance and adjust the boost voltage to maintain constant boost performance regardless of changing motor temperature.
If this boost voltage (typically used for faster acceleration) is excessive for constant low speed operation, it can be automatically reduced to acceptable levels by programming [Run/Accel
Boost].
Refer to the diagram on page 5–51 for further information.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
9
Read and Write
“Auto 30%”
Display Drive
“Fan Sel #1” 0
see “Fan Select 1 & 2/No Boost” drawing below
“Fan Sel #2” 1
see “Fan Select 1 & 2/No Boost” drawing below
“No Boost” 2
see “Fan Select 1 & 2/No Boost” drawing below
“Auto 15%” 3
minimum auto boost
“Auto 30%” 4
“Auto 45%” 5
“Auto 60%” 6
.
.
.
“Auto 75%” 7
“Auto 90%” 8 .
.
“Auto 105%” 9 .
“Auto 120%” 10
maximum auto boost
“Full Custom” 11
see “Full Custom” drawing below
“Fixed” 12
see “Fixed” drawing below
[Start Boost]
[Run Boost]
These parameters were moved to the “Motor Control” group in firmware version 4.01.
Refer to page 5–52 for parameter descriptions.
Programming
Advanced Setup
[Run/Accel Boost] – Firmware below 4.01
Sets the percentage of Auto Boost that is applied to the motor during constant speed or decel. If Auto
Boost is selected in the [DC Boost Select] parameter (see preceding page), boost is applied as shown in the adjacent chart.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Drive Mode Auto Boost Applied
169
Read and Write
1%
100%
0%
100%
Accelerating
Constant Speed
Decelerating
Programmed Auto Boost %
Programmed Auto Boost % x [Run/Accel Boost]
Programmed Auto Boost % x [Run/Accel Boost]
[PWM Frequency]
This parameter sets the carrier frequency for the sine coded PWM output waveform.
This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.
Refer to page 1–1 for Frame Reference information and the Derating Guidelines in Appendix A.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
45
Read and Write
2 KHz / KHz/2
Based on drive type
2 KHz
A Frame Drives = 10 kHz
B Frame Drives = 8 kHz
C Frame Drives & Up = 6 kHz
[Analog Invert] – Firmware below 4.01
This parameter enables the inverting function for the analog input signal at TB2.
This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
Analog Invert
Maximum
Speed
84
Read and Write
“Disabled”
Display Drive
“Disabled” 0
“Enabled” 1
Drive Output
Frequency
Disab led
Ena bled
Minimum
Frequency
0 V
4 mA
Analog Input Signal
10 V
20 mA
[Analog Trim En]
This parameter enables the pot terminals at TB2, terminals 1, 2 & 3 as a trim function to the analog inputs at TB2 terminals 4 & 5 or 4 & 6. A 10k ohm pot provides a trim range of approximately 10% of
[Maximum Freq]. Drive status must be “Stopped” before programming changes will take effect.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
90
Read and Write
“Disabled”
Display Drive
“Disabled” 0
“Enabled” 1
5–15
5–16
Advanced Setup
Programming
[4-20mA Loss Sel]
This parameter selects the drives reaction to a loss of 4-20mA signal when the active [Freq Source] is
4-20mA.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
150
Read and Write
“Min/Alarm”
Display Drive
“Min/Alarm” 0
Drive outputs [Minimum Freq] and issues an alarm.
“Stop/Fault” 1
Drive stops and issues “Hertz Err
Fault”.
“Hold/Alarm” 2
Drive maintains last output freq and issues an alarm.
“Max/Alarm” 3
Drive outputs [Maximum Freq] and issues an alarm.
“Pre1/Alarm” 4
Drive outputs [Preset Freq 1] and issues an alarm.
[Accel Time 2]
This value determines the time it will take the drive to ramp from 0 Hz to [Maximum Freq]. The rate determined by this value and [Maximum Freq] is linear unless [S Curve Enable] is “Enabled.” It applies to any increase in command frequency unless [Accel Time 1] is selected.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
30
Read and Write
0.1 Second / Seconds x 10 (x 100 frn < 4.01)
10.0 Sec
0.0 Sec
3600.0 Sec (600.0 frn < 4.01)
Important: Please note the resolution and Maximum Value changes with Frn 4.01.
[Decel Time 2]
This value determines the time it will take the drive to ramp from [Maximum Freq] to 0 Hz. The rate determined by this value and [Maximum Freq] is linear unless [S Curve Enable] is “Enabled.” It applies to any decrease in command frequency unless [Decel Time 1] is selected.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
31
Read and Write
0.1 Second / Seconds x 10 (x 100 frn < 4.01)
10.0 Sec
0.0 Sec
3600.0 Sec (600.0 frn < 4.01)
Important: Please note the resolution and Maximum Value changes with Frn 4.01.
[Stop Select 1]
This parameter selects the stopping mode when the drive receives a valid stop command unless
[Stop Select 2] is selected.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
10
Read and Write
“Coast”
Display Drive
“Coast” 0
Causes the drive to turn off immediately.
“DC Brake” 1
Injects DC braking voltage into the motor.
Requires a value in both [DC Hold Time]
& [DC Hold Level].
“Ramp” 2
Drive decelerates to 0 Hz., then if [DC
Hold Time] & [DC Hold Level] are greater than zero the holding brake is applied. If the values equal zero, then the drive turns off. Requires a value in [Decel Time
1] or [Decel Time 2].
“S Curve” 3
Drive causes S Curve Ramp to 0 Hz in
[Decel Time 1] or [Decel Time 2] x 2.
“Ramp to Hold” 4
Drive decelerates to zero Hertz then injects holding brake per [DC Hold Level]
(limited to 70% of drive rated amps) until a) a Start command is issued or b) the
Enable input is opened.
Ramp-to-Stop
Programming
5–17
Advanced Setup
[DC Hold Time]
This value sets the amount of time that the
[DC Hold Level] voltage will be applied to the motor when the stop mode is set to either
”DC Brake” or “Ramp.”
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
12
Read and Write
1 Second / Seconds x 10 (x 1 frn < 4.01)
0.0 Sec (0 frn < 4.01)
0.0 Sec (0 frn < 4.01)
90.0 Sec (15 frn < 4.01)
Important: Please note the resolution and value changes with Frn 4.01.
[DC Hold Level]
This value sets the DC voltage applied to the motor to produce the selected current during braking, when the stop mode is set to either “DC Brake,”
“Ramp” or “Ramp to Hold.” If “Ramp to Hold” is the active stop mode, [DC Hold Level] will be clamped at 70%, even if higher values are programmed.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
!
13
Read and Write
1 % of [Rated Amps] / 4096 = 100%
100 %
0 %
150 %
ATTENTION: If a hazard of injury due to movement of equipment or material exists, an auxiliary mechanical braking device must be used to stop the motor.
ATTENTION: This feature should not be used with synchronous or permanent magnet motors. Motors may be demagnetized during braking.
[Hold Level Sel]– Firmware 4.01 & later
This parameter selects the hold level source for [DC
Hold Level].
This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
231
Read and Write
“DC Hold Lvl”
Display Drive
“DC Hold Lvl” 0
Use [DC Hold Level], param. 13.
“0-10 Volt” 1
Adjustable through 10V input, TB2,
4 & 5.
“4-20 mA” 2
Adjustable through 4-20mA input,
TB2, 4 & 6.
Brake-to-Stop
Voltage
Volts/Speed
V o tl a g e
S p e e d
DC Hold
Time
DC Hold Level
Volts/Speed
Speed
DC Hold
Time
DC Hold Level
Time
Stop Command
Ramp-to-Hold
Stop Command
Time
Volts/Speed
V o tl a g e
S p e e d
Stop Command
Time
Reissuing a Start Command at this point will cause the drive to Restart and Ramp as shown
DC Hold Level
Opening Enable Input instead of reissuing a Start Command will cause drive to Stop
5–18
Advanced Setup
[Stop Select 2]
Programming
[Bus Limit En]
Enables the function that attempts to limit the drive
DC bus voltage to 110% of nominal voltage during rapid decel. If bus voltage rises above the 110% level,
[BUS Limit En] reduces or stops the drive decel rate until bus voltage falls below the 110% level.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
[Motor Type]
This parameter should be set to match the type of motor connected to the drive.
This parameter selects the stopping mode when the drive receives a valid stop command unless
[Stop Select 1] is selected.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
[KI Amps] – Firmware 2.03-3.01
Sets the integral gain for the current limiting function of the drive. Default values are chosen for high inertia loads. If faster accel is required, raising the gain will allow additional current to the motor.
Excess gain settings may create unstable operation.
Important: [Kp Amps] should be adjusted in equal proportion or unstable operation may occur.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
[KP Amps]
Sets the proportional gain for the current limiting function of the drive. Default values are chosen for high inertia loads. If faster accel is required, raising the gain will allow additional current to the motor.
Excess gain settings may create unstable operation.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
11
Read and Write
“Disabled”
Display Drive
“Disabled” 0
Allow bus voltage to rise above
110%.
“Enabled” 1
Limit bus voltage/decel ramp.
41
Read and Write
“Induction”
Display Drive
“Induction” 0
Requires no additional setting.
“Sync Reluc” 1
[Slip @ F.L.A.] must be set to zero.
“Sync PM” 2
[Stop Select 1 & 2] must be set to a selection other than “DC Brake” and
[Slip @ F.L.A.] be set to zero.
52
Read and Write
“Coast”
Display Drive
“Coast” 0
Causes the drive to turn off immediately.
“DC Brake” 1
Injects DC braking voltage into the motor.
Requires a value in both [DC Hold Time]
& [DC Hold Level].
“Ramp” 2
Drive decelerates to 0 Hz., then if [DC
Hold Time] & [DC Hold Level] are greater than zero the holding brake is applied. If the values equal zero, then the drive turns off. Requires a value in [Decel Time
1] or [Decel Time 2].
“S Curve” 3
Drive causes S Curve Ramp to 0 Hz in
[Decel Time 1] or [Decel Time 2] x 2.
“Ramp to Hold” 4
Drive decelerates to zero Hertz then injects holding brake per [DC Hold Level]
(limited to 70% of drive rated amps) until a) a Start command is issued or b) the
Enable input is opened.
192
Read and Write
NA / NA
100
25
800
193
Read and Write
NA / NA
100
25
400 (800 frn < 3.01)
Programming
This group of parameters contains internally stored frequency settings.
5–19
Frequency Set
[Freq Select 1]
This parameter controls which of the frequency sources is currently supplying the
[Freq Command] to the drive unless
[Freq Select 2] or [Preset Freq 1-7] is selected.
Refer to the Speed Select Input Table in Chapter 2.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
[Freq Select 2]
This parameter controls which of the frequency sources is currently supplying the
[Freq Command] to the drive unless
[Freq Select 1] or [Preset Freq 1-7] is selected.
Refer to the Speed Select Input Table in Chapter 2.
[Jog Frequency]
This parameter sets the frequency the drive will output when it receives a valid jog command.
[Preset Freq 1-7]
These values set the frequencies that the drive will output when selected. Refer to Speed Select Input table in Chapter 2.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Number(s)
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
5
Read and Write
“Adapter 1”
Display Drive
“Adapter 1” 6
“Adapter 2” 7
“Adapter 3” 8
“Adapter 4” 9
“Adapter 5” 10
“Adapter 6” 11
“Preset 1-7” 12-18
“Use Last” 0
“Remote Pot” 1
“0-10 Volt” 2
“4-20 mA” 3
“Pulse Ref” 4
Refer to [Pulse/Enc Scale] Scale Value
“MOP” 5
6
Read and Write
“Preset 1”
Display Drive
“Adapter 1” 6
“Adapter 2” 7
“Adapter 3” 8
“Adapter 4” 9
“Adapter 5” 10
“Adapter 6” 11
“Preset 1-7” 12-18
“Use Last” 0
“Remote Pot” 1
“0-10 Volt” 2
“4-20 mA” 3
“Pulse Ref” 4
Refer to [Pulse/Enc Scale] Scale Value
“MOP” 5
24
Read and Write
0.1 Hertz / Hertz x 100
10.0 Hz
0.0 Hz
400.0 Hz
27-29 & 73-76
Read and Write
0.1 Hertz / Hertz x 100
0.0 Hz
0.0 Hz
400.0 Hz
5–20
Programming
Frequency Set
[Skip Freq 1-3]
These values, in conjunction with [Skip Freq Band], create a range of frequencies at which the drive will not continuously operate.
Parameter Number(s)
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
32-34
Read and Write
1 Hertz / Hertz
400 Hz
0 Hz
400 Hz
[Skip Freq Band]
This parameter determines the band width around a
[Skip Frequency]. The actual band width is
2 x [Skip Freq Band] –– 1/2 the band above and 1/2 the band below the skip frequency.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Skip Frequency Band
Frequency
A c t u a l
Command
Frequency
D r vi e
F r e q u e n c y
Skip Frequency
35
Read and Write
1 Hertz / Hertz
0 Hz
0 Hz
15 Hz
Skip Band
Time
[MOP Increment]
This value sets the rate of increase or decrease to the [Freq Command] for each input to the Dig Pot
Up or Dig Pot Down terminals at TB3 –– Requires
[Input Mode] selection 5, 9, 10 or 15 (see Input
Mode Selection figure in Chapter 2), RIO Adapter or other SCANport adapter to function.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
22
Read and Write
0.1 Hertz/Second / 255=(78% of [Maximum Freq])/Sec
1.1 Hz/Sec
0 Hz/Sec
(78% of [Maximum Freq]) / Sec
[Save MOP Ref] – Firmware 4.01 & later
If this parameter is enabled, the frequency command issued by the MOP inputs will be saved to
EEPROM (in the event of power loss) and reused on power up. When disabled, no value is saved and the
MOP reference is reset to zero on power up.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
[Freq Ref SqRoot] –Firmware 4.01 & later
This parameter activates the square root function for
0-10V or 4-20 mA inputs when used as a frequency reference. If the input signal varies with the square of speed, the parameter should be set to “Enabled.”
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
230
Read and Write
“Disabled”
Display Drive
“Disabled” 0
“Enabled” 1
229
Read and Write
“Disabled”
Display Drive
“Disabled” 0
“Enabled” 1
Programming
5–21
Frequency Set
[Pulse/Enc Scale]
This parameter contains the scaling factor for both pulse train inputs (TB2-7, 8) and encoder feedback speed regulation (TB3 terminals 31-36).
1. Encoder Feedback Operation
Enter actual encoder pulses per revolution
2. Pulse Train Input
Scale
Factor
=
Incoming Pulse Rate (Hz)
Desired Command Freq.
x
Motor Poles
2
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
46
Read and Write
Factor / Pulses per Rev
1024 PPR (64 PPR frn < 4.01)
1
4096
Pulse Train Example:
4 Pole Motor, 60 Hz = Max. Speed.
The 1336–MOD–N1 option outputs 64 Hz/Hz.
At full analog reference, the pulse output will be 60 Hz x 64 Hz/Hz = 3840 pulses/sec.
Pulse/Enc Scale
=
3840 Hz
60 Hz x
4 Poles
= 128
2
This value will create a command frequency of
60 Hz for full analog reference to the option.
Feature Select
This group contains the necessary parameters to activate and program advanced features of the drive.
[Dwell Frequency]
This value sets the frequency that the drive will immediately output (no Accel Ramp) upon a start command. This parameter requires a programmed
[Dwell Time].
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
43
Read and Write
0.1 Hertz / Hertz x 10
0.0 Hz
0.0 Hz
7.0 Hz
[Dwell Time]
This value sets the time the drive will continue to output [Dwell Frequency] before ramping to [Freq
Command].
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Dwell Time
Maximum
Frequency of
Applied Voltage
Dwell
Time
Dwell Frequency
0
0
Start
Command
44
Read and Write
1 Second / Seconds
0 Sec
0 Sec
10 Sec
Time
5–22
Programming
Feature Select
[Speed Control]
This parameter selects the type of speed modulation active in the drive.
This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.
Important: If encoder feedback closed loop speed regulation is required, “Encoder Fdbk” must be selected.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
77
Read and Write
“Slip Comp” (“No Control” frn < 4.01)
Display Drive
“No Control” 0
Frequency regulation
“Slip Comp” 1
Slip compensation
“Speed Droop” 2
Negative slip compensation
“PLL” 3
Phase lock loop (requires frn < 4.01)
“Encoder Fdbk” 4
Encoder feedback–closed loop
“Droop + Reg” 5
Enc. fdbk.–closed loop w/ active droop
“P Jump” 6
Traverse function
“Process PI” 7
Closed loop PI control
42
Read and Write
0.1 Hertz / Hertz x 10
1.0 Hz (0.0 Hz frn < 4.01)
0.0 Hz
10.0 Hz (5.0 frn < 4.01)
[Slip @ F.L.A.]
This value sets the amount of automatic increase or decrease to the drive output to compensate for motor slip. When [Speed Control] is set to “Slip
Comp”, a percentage of this value proportional to output current is added to the drive output frequency. When [Speed Control] is set to “Droop”, a percentage of this value proportional to output current is subtracted from the drive output frequency.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
[Slip Comp Gain]– Firmware 4.01 & later
This parameter is the gain for the slip compensation and adjusts the recovery rate after a load change.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
195
Read and Write
None
1
1
40
[Run On Power Up]
This parameter enables the function that allows the drive to automatically restart on Power Up. This parameter requires that a two wire control scheme be installed at TB3 and that a valid start contact be present. Refer to Input Mode Selection figure in
Chapter 2.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
!
14
Read and Write
“Disabled”
Display Drive
“Disabled” 0
“Enabled” 1
ATTENTION: This parameter may only be used as outlined in
NFPA79, paragraph 6-14 (exceptions 1-3) for specialized applications. Equipment damage and/or personal injury may result if this parameter is used in an inappropriate application.
[Reset/Run Tries]
This value sets the maximum number of times the drive attempts to reset a fault and restart before the drive issues a “Max Retries Fault”. See Chapter 6 for a list of resettable faults.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
85
Read and Write
1 Try / Tries
0
0
9
Programming
5–23
Feature Select
[Reset/Run Time]
This value sets the time between restart attempts when [Reset/Run Tries] is set to a value other than zero.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
[S Curve Enable]
This parameter enables the fixed shape S curve accel/decel ramp. Programmed accel/decel times are doubled if [S Curve Time] is set to “0”. An adjustable S curve will be created if [S Curve Time] is greater than zero.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
15
Read and Write
0.1 Second / Seconds x 100
1.0 Sec
0.5 Sec
30.0 Sec
57
Read and Write
“Disabled”
Display Drive
“Disabled” 0
“Enabled” 1
[S Curve Time]
This creates an adjustable s curve ramp. If S Curve
Time is < the programmed accel/decel time, the actual ramp will be the sum of the two. If S Curve
Time is
≥
the programmed accel/decel times, a fixed
S curve will be created whose time is double the programmed accel/decel time.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
56
Read and Write
0.1 Second / Seconds x 10 (x 100 frn < 4.01)
0.0 Sec
0.0 Sec
1800.0 Sec (300.0 frn < 4.01)
Important: Please note the resolution and Maximum Value changes with Frn 4.01.
Fixed S Curve
Accel Time = 2 x [Accel Time 1 or 2]
Decel Time = 2 x [Decel Time 1 or 2]
Adjustable S Curve
Case 1
(see adjacent diagram)
[S Curve Time] < [Accel Time 1 or 2], and
[S Curve Time] < [Decel Time 1 or 2],
then
Accel Time = [Accel Time 1 or 2] + [S Curve Time],
and
Decel Time = [Decel Time 1 or 2] + [S Curve Time]
Case 2
[S Curve Time]
≥
[Accel Time 1 or 2], and
[S Curve Time]
≥
[Decel Time 1 or 2],
then
Accel Time = 2 x [Accel Time 1 or 2], and
Decel Time = 2 x [Decel Time 1 or 2]
Note: If [S Curve Time]
≥
programmed accel/decel times any further increase in [S Curve Time] will have no effect on the total accel/decel times.
Speed
Speed
Accel Time
1 or 2
S Curve Time + Accel Time 1 or 2
Time
Decel Time
1 or 2
S Curve Time + Decel Time 1 or 2
Accel Time
1 or 2
Time
Decel Time
1 or 2
5–24
Programming
Feature Select
[Language]
This parameter selects between English and the alternate language for the HIM display.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
47
Read and Write
“English”
Display Drive
“English” 0
“Alternate” 1
[Speed Control]
This parameter is now located earlier in this group (effective with firmware version 4.01).
Refer to page 5–22 for parameter description.
[Flying Start En]
This value enables the flying start function and chooses the method to be used. The drive will first search from the direction it was last running.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
!
155
Read and Write
Disabled
Display Drive
“Disabled” 0
“Speed Search” 1
Freq. sweep –see [FStart For./Rev.]
“Use Encoder” 2
Requires feedback encoder
“Track Volts” 3
Read back EMF from sync. p.m.
motor
ATTENTION: The “Speed Search” selection should not be used with synchronous or permanent magnet motors. Motors may be demagnetized during braking.
[FStart Forward]
This value sets the frequency at which the forward speed search begins. If this value exceeds
[Maximum Freq], speed search will begin at
[Maximum Freq]. Forward search ends at zero Hertz or when motor speed is found.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
156
Read and Write
1 Hertz / Hertz
60 Hz
0 Hz
400 Hz
[FStart Reverse]
This value sets the frequency at which the reverse speed search begins. If this value exceeds
[Maximum Freq], speed search will begin at
[Maximum Freq]. Reverse search ends at zero Hertz or when motor speed is found.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
[LLoss Restart] – Firmware 4.01 & later
This parameter selects the reconnect mode after recovery from a line loss condition.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
157
Read and Write
1 Hertz / Hertz
0 Hz
0 Hz
400 Hz
228
Read and Write
“Track Volts”
Display Drive
“Speed Search” 1
Frequency sweep
“Use Encoder” 2
Read feedback
“Track Volts” 3
Read motor volts
“Last Speed” 4
Start at last output
Programming
5–25
Feature Select
[Traverse Period]
This value sets the time to complete one cycle of speed modulation.
[Max Traverse]
This value sets the peak amplitude of speed modulation.
Traverse Function
40
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
78
Read and Write
0.01 Second / Seconds x 100
0.00 Sec
0.00 Sec
30.00 Sec
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
79
Read and Write
0.01 Hertz / 32767 = [Maximum Freq]
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
50% of [Maximum Freq]
Reference
Output
Traverse Period
P-Jump (+)
P-Jump (–)
Maximum Traverse (+)
Maximum Traverse (–)
20
Traverse
0
P-Jump
–20
10 20 30
Seconds
40 50 60
[P Jump]
This value sets the slip or inertia compensation amplitude of speed modulation.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
80
Read and Write
0.01 Hertz / 32767 = [Maximum Freq]
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
25% of [Maximum Freq]
5–26
Programming
I/O Config
This group of parameters contains the programming options for digital and analog drive outputs. This group was named “Output Config” in firmware versions before 4.01.
[Input Mode]
This parameter selects the functions of inputs 1-8 at
TB3 when an optional interface card is installed.
Refer to Input Mode Selection figure in Chapter 2.
This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running. Power to the drive must be cycled before any changes will affect drive operation.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
[CR1-4 Out Select]–Firmware 4.01 & later
This parameter sets the condition that changes the state of the output contacts at TB2 terminals 10 & 11
(CR1), 11 & 12 (CR2), 13, 14, 15 (CR3) and 16, 17,
18 (CR4).
A change of state may mean energize or de-energize the relay, since some relays may energize on power-up and de-energize when the selected condition occurs.
A red LED located on the Main Control Board indicates the status of the CR3 contact. The LED will illuminate when the contacts at terminals 13 & 14 of
TB2 are closed and terminals 14 & 15 are open.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
21
Read and Write
Mode Number / Selection
1
1
24
158, 174-176
Read and Write
“At speed” CR1
“Running” CR2
“Fault” CR3
“Alarm” CR4
Display Drive
“Running” 2
Outputting frequency
“At Speed” 3
Output = command
“At Freq” 4
Requires value in [Dig Out Freq]
“At Current” 5
Requires value in [Dig Out Curr]
“At Torque” 6
Requires value in [Dig Out Torque]
“Current Lmt” 7
In overload
“Mtr Overload” 8
At present levels O.L. will occur
“Line Loss” 9
Line loss in progress
“Drive Power” 10
Full input volts present, bus charged
“Drive Ready” 11
All necessary commands present
“Forward Run” 12
Forward direction
“Reverse Run” 13
Reverse direction
“Braking” 14
DC brake mode (stopping or holding)
“Economize” 15
Auto economizer active
“Auto Reset” 16
Attempt to reset fault & restart drive
“Fault” 0
Any fault
“Alarm” 1
Any unmasked alarm
[Digital Out Sel] – Firmware below 4.01
This parameter sets the condition that closes the output contact at TB2 terminals 10 & 11.
[Dig Out Current]
This value sets the trip point for the output contact at
TB2 terminals 10 & 11 when [Digital Out Sel] is set to “At Current”. The contact will be closed when above this value.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
158
Read and Write
“At Speed”
Display Drive
“At Speed” 0
“At Frequency” 1
Requires value in [Dig Out Freq]
“At Current” 2
Requires value in [Dig Out Curr]
“At Torque” 3
Requires value in [Dig Out Torque]
[Dig Out Freq]
This value sets the trip point for the output contact at
TB2 terminals 10 & 11 when [Digital Out Sel] is set to “At Frequency”. The contact will be closed when above this value.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
159
Read and Write
0.01 Hertz / 32767 = Max Freq
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
Programmed [Maximum Freq]
160
Read and Write
0% / 4096 = 100% of Drive Rated Amps
0 %
0 %
200 %
Programming
I/O Config
[Dig Out Torque]
This value sets the trip point for the output contact at
TB2 terminals 10 & 11 when [Digital Out Sel] is set to “At Torque”. The contact will be closed when above this value.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
161
Read and Write
0.1 Amps / 4096 = Rated Torque Amps
0.0 Amps
0.0 Amps
200% of [Rated Amps]
5–27
[Set 0-10 Vlt Lo] – Firmware 4.01 & later
Sets the percentage of the 0-10 volt input that represents [Minimum Freq].
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
237
Read and Write
0.1 % / 4096 = 100%
0.0 %
–300.0 %
+300.0 %
[Set 0-10 Vlt Hi] – Firmware 4.01 & later
Sets the percentage of the 0-10 volt input that represents [Maximum Freq].
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
[Set 4-20 mA Lo] – Firmware 4.01 & later
Sets the percentage of the 4-20 mA input that represents [Minimum Freq].
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
238
Read and Write
0.1 % / 4096 = 100%
100.0 %
–300.0 %
+300.0 %
239
Read and Write
0.1 % / 4096 = 100%
0.0 %
–300.0 %
+300.0 %
[Set 4-20 mA Hi] – Firmware 4.01 & later
Sets the percentage of the 4-20 mA input that represents [Maximum Freq].
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
240
Read and Write
0.1 % / 4096 = 100%
100.0 %
–300.0 %
+300.0 %
Analog Input Configuration
Examples shown are for 0-10V. Settings for 4-20 mA are similar.
Normal/Default
10
8
6
4
2
0
0 6 12 18 24 30 36
Output Hertz
42
[Minimum Freq] = 0 Hz
[Maximum Freq] = 60 Hz
[Set 0-10 Vlt Lo] = 0%
[Set 0-10 Vlt Hi] = 100%
48 54 60
Minimum input (0% of 10V=0V) represents minimum frequency of 0 Hz and maximum input (100% of
10V=10V) represents maximum frequency of 60 Hz.
Offset
10
8
6
4
2
0
0 6 12 18 24 30 36
Output Hertz
42
[Minimum Freq] = 0 Hz
[Maximum Freq] = 60 Hz
[Set 0-10 Vlt Lo] = 20%
[Set 0-10 Vlt Hi] = 100%
48 54 60
2-10 volt input signal provides 0-60 Hz output, resulting in a 2 volt offset in the speed command.
Invert
10
8
6
4
2
0
0 6 12 18 24 30 36
Output Hertz
42
[Minimum Freq] = 0 Hz
[Maximum Freq] = 60 Hz
[Set 0-10 Vlt Lo] = 100%
[Set 0-10 Vlt Hi] = 0%
48 54 60
Maximum input (100% of 10V=10V) represents a minimum frequency of 0 Hz & minimum input (0% of
10V=0V) represents a maximum frequency of 60 Hz.
5–28
I/O Config
Programming
[Analog Out Sel]
This parameter selects the source that will drive the analog output. This output is intended for metering only and should not be used as process control feedback.
Important: Firmware versions below 4.01 will have fewer selections available.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
25
Read and Write
“Frequency”
Display Drive
“Frequency” 0
Zero to programmed [Maximum Freq]
“Current” 1
Zero to 200%
“Torque” 2
Zero to 200%
“Power” 3
Zero to 200%
“Voltage” 4
Zero to 200%
“% Motor OL” 5
Zero to 200%
“% Drive OL” 6
Zero to 200%
“Encoder” 7
See [Pulse/Enc Hertz]
“Speed Error” 8
See [Speed Error]
“PI Reference” 9
See [PI Reference]
“PI Feedback” 10
See [PI Feedback]
“PI Error” 11
See [PI Error]
“PI Output” 12
See [PI Output]
154
Read and Write
“Disabled”
Display Drive
“Disabled” 0
“Enabled” 1
[Anlg Out Offset]
This parameter enables the voltage or current offset for the analog output TB2 terminals 4 & 9. This internal value offsets 0-20mA to 4-20mA and
0-10V to 2-10V.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
Analog Out Offset
Maximum
Speed
Offset
Drive Output
Frequency
[Abs Analog Out] –Firmware 4.01 & later
This parameter selects whether a signed value or absolute value is used for analog out.
[Set Anlg Out Lo] –Firmware 4.01 & later
Sets the percentage of the [Analog Out Sel] value that equals 0V/0 mA output.
[Set Anlg Out Hi] –Firmware 4.01 & later
Sets the percentage of the [Analog Out Sel] value that equals 10V/20 mA output.
Minimum
Frequency
0 V
0 mA
2 V
4 mA
Analog Output Signal
10 V
20 mA
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
233
Read and Write
“Enabled”
Display Drive
“Disabled” 0
“Enabled” 1
234
Read and Write
0.1 % / 4096 = 100%
0.0 %
–300.0 %
+300.0 %
235
Read and Write
0.1 % / 4096 = 100%
100.0 %
–300.0 %
+300.0 %
Faults
[Fault Buffer 0-3]
These parameters store the last (4) faults that occur.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
[Clear Fault]
Selecting “Clear Fault” and pressing Enter will clear any faults and return the drive to ready status.
[Cur Lim Trip En]
This setting determines the drive response when the hardware current limit is exceeded. The current limit is approximately 180% of [Rated VT Amps] for B
Frame drives & up, and approximately 250% of
[Rated VT Amps] for A Frame drives.
[Shear Pin Fault]–Firmware 4.01 & later
Enabling this parameter allows the drive to generate a Shear Pin Fault (F63) if the output amps exceed the programmed software current limit value in
[Current Limit].
[Motor OL Fault] –Firmware 4.01 & later
This parameter enables or disables the motor overload protection feature of the drive.
[Line Loss Fault]
This setting determines how a 15% drop in DC Bus voltage will affect drive operation. See following diagram.
Programming
This group of parameters allows configuring, viewing and clearing drive faults.
5–29
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
86-89
Read and Write
None
Display Drive
“0” 0
Last Fault
“1” 1
Fault from Buffer 0
“2” 2
Fault from Buffer 1
“3” 3
Fault from Buffer 2
51
Read and Write
“Ready”
Display Drive
“Ready” 0
“Clear Fault” 1
82
Read and Write
“Disabled”
Display Drive
“Disabled” 0
No Fault Generated – C.L. Activated
“Enabled” 1
Diag C Lim Flt Generated
226
Read and Write
“Disabled”
Display Drive
“Disabled” 0
No Fault Generated
“Enabled” 1
Fault Generated
201
Read and Write
“Enabled”
Display Drive
“Disabled” 0
No Fault Generated
“Enabled” 1
Fault Generated
40
Read and Write
“Disabled” (“Enabled” frn < 4.01)
Display Drive
“Disabled” 0
No Fault Generated
“Enabled” 1
Power Loss Fault Generated
5–30
Programming
Faults
Power Loss Ride-Thru
The 1336 plus has the ability to ride through short power interruptions. On loss of input power to the drive, the drive offers two methods of operation.
Diagram 1
With the Line Loss Fault parameter disabled, if a power interruption occurs (T1) the drive will continue to operate off stored DC bus energy until bus voltage drops to 85% of its nominal value (T2). At this point, the drive output is shut off, allowing the DC bus to discharge more slowly. The drive will retain its logic and operating status as long as bus voltage is above the absolute minimum bus voltage (refer to Appendix). If bus voltage should fall below this level (T5), the drive will trip and
Undervolt Fault will be displayed. If input power is restored before this minimum is reached (T3) and bus voltage rises above the
85% level (T4), the drive will restore output power to the motor and resume running.
Diagram 2
With the Line Loss Fault parameter enabled, if input power is lost
(T1) the drive will continue to operate until the bus voltage falls below 85% of nominal (T2). At this point the drive output is turned off and a 500 ms timer is started. One of the following conditions will then occur:
1. The bus voltage will fall below minimum before the time expires (T6). This will generate an Undervolt Fault.
2. The bus voltage will remain below 85% but above minimum and the timer expires (T5). This will generate a Line Loss Fault.
3. The input power is restored (T3) and the bus voltage rises above the 85% level before the timer expires (T4). This allows the drive to turn its output on and resume running.
Line Loss Restart
In the event that a line loss condition occurs, the 1336 PLUS provides a variety of programmable selections to control the timing and method of reconnecting the motor after power returns.
Choices include:
– Use flying start to determine motor speed.
– Check for motor terminal voltage to determine motor speed.
– Read the encoder, if present.
– Reconnect at last known output frequency.
DIAGRAM 1
Output
Logic
100% V
BUS
85% V
BUS
Minimum V
BUS
Off
Output
Undervoltage Fault
(depends on [Low Bus Fault])
DIAGRAM 2
Output
Logic
100% V
BUS
85% V
BUS
Minimum V
BUS
T1 T2
T3 T4 T5
T1 = Loss of Power
T2 = Bus Level at 85% of Nominal, Outputs Shut Off
T3 = Power Returned
T4 = Outputs Turned On
T5 = Minimum Bus Voltage Level, Undervoltage Fault Point
Off
Output
Line Loss Fault
Undervoltage Fault
(depends on [Low Bus Fault])
T1 T2 T3 T4 T6
T1 = Loss of Power
T5
T2 = Bus Level at 85% of Nominal, Outputs Shut Off
T3 = Power Returned
T4 = Outputs Turned On
T5 = 500mS Time Out, Line Loss Fault
T6 = Minimum Bus Voltage Level, Undervoltage Fault Point
Programming
5–31
Faults
[Blwn Fuse Flt]
Enabling this parameter will allow monitoring of the bus fuse (in 30 kW/40 HP and up drives) and cause a “Blwn Fuse Flt.”
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
81
Read and Write
“Enabled”
Display Drive
“Disabled” 0
No Fault Generated
“Enabled” 1
Blwn Fuse Flt Generated
[Low Bus Fault]
This parameter enables or disables the drive fault condition for bus voltage below the Bus
Undervoltage Trip value listed in the Appendix.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
[Fault Data] –Firmware 4.01 & later
This parameter displays fault related parameter numbers or bit array information. Certain faults generate additional information to aid fault diagnosis.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
[Flt Motor Mode]
This parameter displays the motor mode active at the time of the last fault.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
91
Read and Write
“Enabled”
Display Drive
“Disabled” 0
No Fault Generated
“Enabled” 1
Undervolt Fault Generated
207
Read and Write
Parameter # / Parameter #
None
1
255
143
Read Only
None
Display Drive
“1” 1
Power up sequence in progress
“2” 2
Motor connected, drive off
“3” 3
DC boost being applied
“4” 4
Motor running at [Dwell Frequency]
“5” 5
Motor accelerating
“6” 6
Motor at command speed
“7” 7
Motor decelerating
“8” 8
Motor coasting
“9” 9
Motor under DC braking
“10” 10
Waiting for fault reset – returns to 0
“11” 11
Start mode
“12” 12
Flying start search enable
“13” 13
Flying start w/encoder in process
5–32
Faults
Programming
[Flt Power Mode]
This parameter displays the power mode active at the time of the last fault. These values can be helpful in troubleshooting for a condition causing a fault.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
144
Read Only
None
Display Drive
“1” 1
Power up sequence in progress
“2” 2
Precharge in progress
“3” 3
Bus voltage being stored in memory
“4” 4
Ready for run cmnd. after power up
“5” 5
Power stage diagnostics running
“6” 6
Line loss detection occurred
“7” 7
Ready for run command after stop
“8” 8
Drive running
“9” 9
Motor flux decay delay
“10” 10
DC braking in progress
“11” 11
Drive fault occurred
“12” 12
Flying start search enabled
“13” 13
Deceleration in progress
“14” 14
SCR wake mode
“15” 15
SCR check mode
“16” 16
SCR wait mode
[Fault Frequency]
This parameter stores and displays the last
[Output Freq] prior to a fault.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
145
Read Only
0.01 Hertz / 32767 = Maximum Freq.
None
0.00 Hz
400.00 Hz
[Flt Driv Status]
This parameter stores and displays the last [Drive Status] prior to a fault.
Bits 0-7 are displayed on lower half of line 2 on HIM display, while, bits
8-15 are displayed on the upper half of line 2.
With drive software versions above
2.00 and a Series A (version 3.0) or
Series B HIM, a Status description
(bit ENUM) is displayed on line 1.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Reference
ID
15 14 13 12 Reference
Freq Select 1 0 0 0 0
Preset Freq 1 0 0 0 1
Preset Freq 2 0 0 1 0
Preset Freq 3 0 0 1 1
Preset Freq 4 0 1 0 0
Preset Freq 5 0 1 0 1
Preset Freq 6 0 1 1 0
Preset Freq 7 0 1 1 1
Freq Select 2 1 0 0 0
Adapter 1 1 0 0 1
Adapter 2
Adapter 3
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
Adapter 4
Adapter 5
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
Adapter 6 1 1 1 0
Jog Frequency 1 1 1 1
146
Read Only
Local
Adapter ID
Local 11 10 9
2
3
TB3
1
0 0 0
0 0 1
0 1 0
0 1 1
4
5
1 0 0
1 0 1
6 1 1 0
Unused 1 1 1
Enabled
Running
Command Direction
0 = Reverse
1 = Forward
Actual Direction
0 = Reverse
1 = Forward
Alarm
Faulted
At Speed
Accelerating
Decelerating
Programming
5–33
Faults
[Fault Alarms]
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
173
Read Only
This parameter stores and displays the last alarm conditions present prior to a fault. Refer to Chapter 6 for further alarm information.
With drive software versions above
2.00 and a Series A (version 3.0) or
Series B HIM, a Status description
(bit ENUM) is displayed on line 1.
Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Auto Reset
Motor OL Trip
4-20 mA Loss
Voltage Check
Unused
Heatsink Temp
Auxiliary Input
Ground Warning
Motoring Current Limit
Regenerating Current Limit
Regenerating Voltage Limit
Line Loss In Progress
Mtr Overload
Motor Stalled
Bus Charging
Hardware Current Limit
[Flt Clear Mode]
This parameter controls the method for clearing faults.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
[Ground Warning]
Enables the Ground Warning fault when the drive senses ground current in excess of 2 amperes
(approximate). Refer to Chapter 6 for further information.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
39
Read and Write
“Enabled”
Display Drive
“Disabled” 0
Faults cleared only by cycling power
“Enabled” 1
Faults cleared by issuing a valid stop command (only through
TB3/HIM) or cycling power – refer to
Bit 3 of the Logic Control Structure on page A–13
204
Read and Write
“Disabled”
Display Drive
“Disabled” 0
No Fault Generated
“Enabled” 1
Ground Warning Generated
5–34
Programming
Diagnostics
This group of parameters contains values that can be helpful in explaining the operation of the drive. Drive status, direction, control and alarm conditions as well as drive ratings are included.
[Drive Status]
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
59
Read Only
This parameter displays the actual operating condition in binary format.
Bits 0-7 are displayed on lower half of line 2 on HIM display, while, bits
8-15 are displayed on the upper half of line 2.
With drive software versions above
2.00 and a Series A (version 3.0) or
Series B HIM, a Status description
(bit ENUM) is displayed on line 1.
Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Reference
ID
Reference 15 14 13 12
Freq Select 1 0 0 0 0
Preset Freq 1 0 0 0 1
Preset Freq 2 0 0 1 0
Preset Freq 3 0 0 1 1
Preset Freq 4 0 1 0 0
Preset Freq 5 0 1 0 1
Preset Freq 6 0 1 1 0
Preset Freq 7 0 1 1 1
Freq Select 2 1 0 0 0
Adapter 1 1 0 0 1
Adapter 2
Adapter 3
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
Adapter 4
Adapter 5
Adapter 6
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
Jog Frequency 1 1 1 1
Local
Adapter ID
Local 11 10 9
TB3
1
2
0 0 0
0 0 1
0 1 0
5
6
3
4
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
Unused 1 1 1
Enabled
Running
Command Direction
0 = Reverse
1 = Forward
Actual Direction
0 = Reverse
1 = Forward
Alarm
Faulted
At Speed
Accelerating
Decelerating
[2nd Drive Sts] –Frm. 4.01 & later
This parameter displays the actual operating condition in binary format.
Bits 0-7 are displayed on lower half of line 2 on HIM display, while, bits 8-15 are displayed on the upper half of line 2.
With drive software versions above 4.01 and a Series A (version 3.0) or Series B HIM, a
Status description (bit ENUM) is displayed on line 1.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
236
Read Only
Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Auto Reset
Economize
Braking
Unused
Reverse Run
Forward Run
Drive Ready
Drive Power
At Freq
At Current
At Torque
Current Lmt
Mtr Overload
Line Loss
[Drive Alarm]
This parameter displays which alarm condition is present when bit
6 of [Drive Status] is high
(set to 1). Refer to Chapter 6 for further alarm information.
With drive software versions above
2.00 and a Series A (version 3.0) or
Series B HIM, a Status description
(bit ENUM) is displayed on line 1.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
60
Read Only
Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Auto Reset
Motor OL Trip
4-20 mA Loss
Voltage Check
Unused
Heatsink Temp
Auxiliary Input
Ground Warning
Motoring Current Limit
Regenerating Current Limit
Regenerating Voltage Limit
Line Loss In Progress
Mtr Overload
Motor Stalled
Bus Charging
Hardware Current Limit
Programming
5–35
Diagnostics
[Latched Alarms]
This parameter “stores” the [Drive
Alarm] indications (see above). Bits will remain set (high/1), even if the alarm condition no longer exists.
The bit(s) must be programmed to zero to release the stored indications.
With drive software versions above
2.00 and a Series A (version 3.0) or
Series B HIM, a Status description
(bit ENUM) is displayed on line 1.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
205
Read Only
Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Auto Reset
Motor OL Trip
4-20 mA Loss
Voltage Check
Unused
Heatsink Temp
Auxiliary Input
Ground Warning
Motoring Current Limit
Regenerating Current Limit
Regenerating Voltage Limit
Line Loss In Progress
Mtr Overload
Motor Stalled
Bus Charging
Hardware Current Limit
[Input Status]
This parameter displays the on/off status of inputs
1-8 at TB3 if an optional interface card is installed.
With drive software versions above 2.00 and a
Series A (version 3.0) or Series B HIM, a Status description (bit ENUM) is displayed on line 1.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
55
Read Only
Input 1 – TB3-19
Input 2 – TB3-20
Input 4 – TB3-23
Input 3 – TB3-22
Input 5 – TB3-24
Input 6 – TB3-26
Input 8 – TB3-28
Input 7 – TB3-27
[Freq Source]
This parameter displays the frequency source currently commanding the drive.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
[Freq Command]
This parameter displays the frequency that the drive is commanded to output. This command may come from any one of the frequency sources selected by
[Freq Select 1] or [Freq Select 2].
[Drive Direction]
This parameter displays the commanded running direction.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
62
Read Only
None
Display Drive
“Adapter 1-6” 6-11
“Preset 1-7” 12-18
“Use Last” 0
“Remote Pot” 1
“0-10 Volt” 2
“4-20 mA” 3
“Pulse Ref” 4
“MOP” 5
65
Read Only
0.01 Hertz / 32767 = Maximum Freq Forward
None
–400.00 Hz
+ 400.00 Hz
69
Read Only
None
Display Drive
“Forward” 0
“Reverse” 1
5–36
Programming
Diagnostics
[Stop Mode Used]
This parameter displays the active stop mode.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
[Motor Mode]
This parameter displays the motor mode.
[Power Mode]
This parameter displays the power mode.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
26
Read Only
None
Display Drive
“Coast” 0
“DC Brake” 1
“Ramp” 2
“S-Curve” 3
“Ramp to Hold” 4
141
Read Only
None
Display Drive
“1” 1
Power up sequence in progress
“2” 2
Motor connected, drive off
“3” 3
DC boost being applied
“4” 4
Motor running at [Dwell Frequency]
“5” 5
Motor accelerating
“6” 6
Motor at command speed
“7” 7
Motor decelerating
“8” 8
Motor coasting
“9” 9
Motor under DC braking
“10” 10
Waiting for fault reset – returns to 0
“11” 11
Start mode
“12” 12
Flying start search enable
“13” 13
Flying start w/encoder in process
142
Read Only
None
Display Drive
“1” 1
Power up sequence in progress
“2” 2
Precharge in progress
“3” 3
Bus voltage being stored in memory
“4” 4
Ready for run command after power up
“5” 5
Power stage diagnostics running
“6” 6
Line loss detection occurred
“7” 7
Ready for run command after stop
“8” 8
Drive running
“9” 9
Motor flux decay delay
“10” 10
DC braking in progress
“11” 11
Drive fault occurred
“12” 12
Flying start search enabled
“13” 13
Deceleration in progress
“14” 14
SCR wake mode
“15” 15
SCR check mode
“16” 16
SCR wait mode
Programming
5–37
Diagnostics
[Output Pulses]
This parameter displays the number of output cycles for the PWM waveform. The count rolls over at
65535.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
[Current Angle]
Firmware Version 3.04 and below
This parameter displays the angle, in degrees, of displacement between output voltage and output current. The cosine of this number is an approximation of output power factor.
Firmware Version 4.01 and higher
This parameter has no function.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
[Heatsink Temp]
This parameter displays the heatsink temperature.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
[Set Defaults]
Setting this parameter to “Defaults Init” resets all parameters to their factory values.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
[DC Bus Memory]
This parameter displays the nominal DC bus voltage level. This value is used to determine line loss, overvoltage, decel frequency and other points.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Display
[EEPROM Cksum] –Firmware 4.01 & later
The value of this parameter provides a checksum value that indicates a change in drive programming has occurred.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
67
Read Only
1 Pulse / Pulses
None
0
65535
72
Read Only
1 Deg / 255 = 360 Deg
None
70
Read Only
1
°
C / Deg. C
None
0
255
°
C
64
Read and Write
“Ready”
Display Drive
“Ready” 0
Display after function complete.
“Store to EE” 1
“Rcll frm EE” 2
“Default Init” 3
Resets all parameters to factory settings.
212
Read Only
1 Volt / Volts
Volts
172
Read Only
None
5–38
Programming
Ratings
This group contains a number of “Read Only” parameters that display drive operating characteristics. This group will only be available with firmware versions 2.01 and above. Refer to the “Diagnostics” group if your firmware is below 2.01.
[Drive Type]
This parameter displays a decimal number which can be translated into the drive catalog number by using the adjacent chart. Refer to Chapter 1 for an explanation of the catalog numbers.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display 1336S– . . .
8449
8450
8451
8452
8453
8454
8455
AQF05
AQF07
AQF10
AQF15
AQF20
AQF30
AQF50
12552 A007
12553 A010
12554 A015
12555 A020
12556 A025
12557 A030
12558 A040
12559 A050
12560 A060
12561 A075
12562 A100
12563 A125
8705
8706
BRF05
BRF07
Display 1336S– . . .
8707
8708
8709
8710
8711
8712
8713
BRF10
BRF15
BRF20
BRF30
BRF50
BRF75
BRF100
12808 B007
12809 B010
12810 B015
12811 B020
12812 B025
12813 B030
12824 BX040
12814 B040
12815 B050
12816 BX060
12825 B060
12817 B075
12818 B100
12819 B125
61
Read Only
Display 1336S– . . .
12826 BX150
12820 B150
12821 B200
12827 B250
12838 BP250
12828 BX250
12829 B300
12839 BP300
12822 B350
12840 BP350
12830 B400
12841 BP400
12832 B450
12842 BP450
12823 B500
12833 B600
8963
8965
8966
8967
CWF10
CWF20
CWF30
CWF50
13064 C007
Display 1336S– . . .
13065 C010
13066 C015
13067 C020
13068 C025
13069 C030
13070 C040
13071 C050
13072 C060
13073 C075
13074 C100
13075 C125
13076 C150
13077 C200
13083 C250
13091 CX300
13085 C300
13078 C350
13086 C400
13088 C450
13079 C500
13089 C600
[Firmware Ver.]
This parameter displays the version number of the drive firmware.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Display
71
Read Only
None / Version x 100
0.00
[Drive Rtd Volts]
This parameter displays the rated input voltage of the drive.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Display
147
Read Only
1 Volt / Volts
Drive Rated Input Voltage
[Rated Amps]
This parameter displays the rated output current of the drive.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Display
170
Read Only
0.1 Amp / Amps x 10
Drive Rated Output Amps
[Rated kW]
This parameter displays the rated kW of the drive.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Display
171
Read Only kW / kW x 100
Drive Rated Output kW
[Rated CT Amps]
This parameter displays the rated output current of the drive.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Display
148
Read Only
0.1 Amp / Amps x 10
Drive Rated Output Amps
Programming
Ratings
[Rated CT kW]
This parameter displays the rated CT kW of the drive.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Display
149
Read Only kW / kW x 100
Drive Rated Output kW
[Rated VT Amps]
This parameter displays the rated output current of the drive.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Display
[Rated VT kW]
This parameter displays the rated VT kW of the drive.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Display
198
Read Only
0.1 Amp / Amps x 10
Drive Rated Amps
199
Read Only kW / kW x 100
Drive Rated kW
Masks
5–39
This group of parameters contains binary masks for all control functions. The masks control which adapters can issue control commands.
Each mask contains a bit for each adapter.
Individual bits can be set to “Zero” to lockout control by an adapter or set to “1” to permit an adapter to have control.
With drive software versions above 2.00 and a
Series A (version 3.0) or Series B HIM, a
Status description (bit ENUM) is displayed on line 1.
[Direction Mask]
This parameter controls which adapters can issue forward/reverse commands.
Mask
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
TB3
Adapter 1
Adapter 2
Adapter 3
Adapter 4
Adapter 5
Adapter 6
Not Used
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
94
Read and Write
01111110
Display Drive
“0” 0
Deny Control
“1” 1
Permit Control
[Start Mask]
This parameter controls which adapters can issue start commands.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
[Jog Mask]
This parameter controls which adapters can issue jog commands.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
95
Read and Write
01111111
Display Drive
“0” 0
Deny Control
“1” 1
Permit Control
96
Read and Write
01111111
Display Drive
“0” 0
Deny Control
“1” 1
Permit Control
5–40
Programming
Masks
[Reference Mask]
This parameter controls which adapters can select an alternate reference; [Frequency Sel 1],
[Frequency Sel 2] or preset speeds.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
[Accel Mask]
This parameter controls which adapters can select
[Accel Time 1] and [Accel Time 2].
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
[Decel Mask]
This parameter controls which adapters can select
[Decel Time 1] and [Decel Time 2]
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
[Fault Mask]
This parameter controls which adapters can reset a fault.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
[MOP Mask]
This parameter controls which adapters can issue
MOP commands to the drive.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
[Logic Mask]
Determines which adapters can control the drive. If the bit for an adapter is set to “0,” the adapter will have no control functions except for stop. In addition, the adapter can be removed from the drive while power is applied without causing a serial fault.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
[Local Mask]
This parameter controls which adapters are allowed to take exclusive control of drive logic commands
(except stop). Exclusive “local” control can only be taken while the drive is stopped.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
97
Read and Write
01111111
Display Drive
“0” 0
Deny Control
“1” 1
Permit Control
98
Read and Write
01111111
Display Drive
“0” 0
Deny Control
“1” 1
Permit Control
99
Read and Write
01111111
Display Drive
“0” 0
Deny Control
“1” 1
Permit Control
100
Read and Write
01111111
Display Drive
“0” 0
Deny Control
“1” 1
Permit Control
101
Read and Write
01111111
Display Drive
“0” 0
Deny Control
“1” 1
Permit Control
92
Read and Write
01111111
Display Drive
“0” 0
Deny Control
“1” 1
Permit Control
93
Read and Write
01111111
Display Drive
“0” 0
Deny Control
“1” 1
Permit Control
Programming
5–41
Masks
[Alarm Mask]
Controls which alarm conditions will activate the alarm contact (refer to
Chapter 2 – TB2) and set the alarm bit (bit 6) in [Drive Status].
With drive software versions above
2.00 and a Series A (version 3.0) or
Series B HIM, a Status description
(bit ENUM) is displayed on line 1.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
206
Read and Write
Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Auto Reset
Motor OL Trip
4-20 mA Loss
Voltage Check
Unused
Heatsink Temp
Auxiliary Input
Ground Warning
Motoring Current Limit
Regenerating Current Limit
Regenerating Voltage Limit
Line Loss In Progress
Mtr Overload
Motor Stalled
Bus Charging
Hardware Current Limit
Owners
This group of parameters contains binary information to display which group of adapters are issuing control commands.
Each Owner Parameter contains a bit for each adapter. The drive will set an adapter’s bit to “1” when that adapter is issuing a logic command and to “Zero” when no command is being issued.
With drive software versions above 2.00 and a
Series A (version 3.0) or Series B HIM, a Status description (bit ENUM) is displayed on line 1.
[Stop Owner]
This parameter displays which adapters are presently issuing a valid stop command.
Owners Display
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Units
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
TB3
Adapter 1
Adapter 2
Adapter 3
Adapter 4
Adapter 5
Adapter 6
Not Used
102
Read Only
Display Drive
“0” 0
Stop Input Not Present
“1” 1
Stop Input Present
[Direction Owner]
This parameter displays which adapter currently has exclusive control of direction changes.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Units
[Start Owner]
This parameter displays which adapters are presently issuing a valid start command.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Units
103
Read Only
Display Drive
“0” 0
Non-Owner
“1” 1
Current Owner
104
Read Only
Display Drive
“0” 0
Start Input Not Present
“1” 1
Start Input Present
5–42
Programming
Owners
[Jog Owner]
This parameter displays which adapters are presently issuing a valid jog command.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Units
[Reference Owner]
This parameter displays which adapter currently has the exclusive control of the selection of the command frequency source.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Units
[Accel Owner]
This parameter displays which adapter has exclusive control of selecting [Accel Time 1] or
[Accel Time 2].
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Units
[Decel Owner]
This parameter displays which adapter has exclusive control of selecting [Decel Time 1] or
[Decel Time 2].
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Units
[Fault Owner]
This parameter displays which adapter is presently resetting a fault.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Units
[MOP Owner]
This parameter displays which adapters are currently issuing increases or decreases in MOP
Command Frequency.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Units
[Local Owner]
This parameter displays which adapter has requested exclusive control of all drive logic functions. If an adapter is in local lockout, all other functions (except stop) on all other adapters are locked out and non-functional. Local control can only be obtained when the drive is not running.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Units
105
Read Only
Display Drive
“0” 0
Jog Input Not Present
“1” 1
Jog Input Present
106
Read Only
Display Drive
“0” 0
Non-Owner
“1” 1
Current Owner
107
Read Only
Display Drive
“0” 0
Non-Owner
“1” 1
Current Owner
108
Read Only
Display Drive
“0” 0
Non-Owner
“1” 1
Current Owner
109
Read Only
Display Drive
“0” 0
Non-Owner
“1” 1
Current Owner
110
Read Only
Display Drive
“0” 0
Non-Owner
“1” 1
Current Owner
179
Read Only
Display Drive
“0” 0
Non-Owner
“1” 1
Current Owner
Programming
5–43
This group of parameters contains the parameters needed for an optional communications adapter to communicate with the drive.
Adapter I/O
These parameters determine the parameter number to which PLC output data table or SCANport device image information will be written. Refer to the A-B
Single Point Remote I/O Adapter manuals or other
SCANport device manual for data link information.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
1336 PLUS
[Data In A1]
[Data In A2]
[Data In B1]
[Data In B2]
[Data In C1]
[Data In C2]
[Data In D1]
[Data In D2]
These parameters determine the parameter number whose value will be read into the PLC input data table or SCANport device image. Refer to the A-B
Single Point Remote I/O Adapter manuals or other
SCANport device manual for data link information.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
1336 PLUS
[Data Out A1]
[Data Out A2]
[Data Out B1]
[Data Out B2]
[Data Out C1]
[Data Out C2]
[Data Out D1]
[Data Out D2]
111-118
Read and Write
Parameter # / Parameter #
SCANport Device
119-126
Read and Write
Parameter # / Parameter #
SCANport Device
5–44
Programming
Process
Display
[Process 1 Par]
This parameter should be set to the number of the parameter whose scaled value will be displayed on
Line 1 of the HIM Display Panel.
The maximum process value that can be displayed is 99,999.99. If this value is exceeded, a character string of asterisks (****) will appear on the display.
This group of parameters contains the parameters used to scale, in “User Units”, any drive parameter for display on the HIM. Two scaled parameter values can be simultaneously displayed when Process Mode is selected.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
127
Read and Write
Parameter # / Parameter #
1
[Process 1 Scale]
This value sets the scaling multiplier for
[Process 1 Par]. The displayed value will be:
[Process 1 Par] actual value
x [Process 1 Scale] value
Displayed Value
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
128
Read and Write
Numeric / Scale x 100
+1.00
–327.68
+ 327.67
129-136
Read and Write
ASCII Code / ASCII Code
“Volts ”
[Process 1 Txt 1-8]
Sets the “User Units” description for the value determined by [Process 1 Par] and [Process 1 Scale].
This 8 character description will be shown on line 1 of the display. Refer to the Character Map in Appendix A.
Parameter Number(s)
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
[Process 2 Par]
This parameter should be set to the number of the parameter whose scaled value will be displayed on
Line 2 of the HIM Display Panel.
The maximum process value that can be displayed is 99,999.99. If this value is exceeded, a character string of asterisks (****) will appear on the display.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
[Process 2 Scale]
This value sets the scaling multiplier for
[Process 2 Par]. The displayed value will be:
[Process 2 Par] actual value
x [Process 2 Scale] value
Displayed Value
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
[Process 2 Txt 1-8]
Sets the “User Units” description for the value determined by [Process 2 Par] and [Process 2 Scale].
This 8 character description will be shown on line 2 of the display. Refer to the Character Map in Appendix A.
Parameter Number(s)
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
180
Read and Write
Parameter # / Parameter #
54
181
Read and Write
Numeric / Scale x 100
+1.00
–327.68
+ 327.67
182-189
Read and Write
ASCII Code / ASCII Code
“Amps ”
Programming
5–45
This group of parameters contains all the parameters necessary to activate encoder feedback for closed loop operation.
Encoder
Feedback
[Speed Control]
This parameter selects the type of speed modulation active in the drive.
This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.
Important: If encoder feedback closed loop speed regulation is required, “Encoder Fdbk” must be selected.
[Encoder Type]
This parameter contains the feedback encoder signal type. The drive can accept single-ended, singlechannel (Pulse) or differential (Quadrature) signals.
This cannot be changed while drive is running.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
77
Read and Write
“Slip Comp” (“No Control” frn < 4.01)
Display Drive
“No Control” 0
Frequency regulation
“Slip Comp” 1
Slip compensation
“Speed Droop” 2
Negative slip compensation
“PLL” 3
Phase lock loop (requires frn < 4.01)
“Encoder Fdbk” 4
Encoder feedback–closed loop
“Droop + Reg” 5
Enc. fdbk.–closed loop w/ active droop
“P Jump” 6
Traverse function
“Process PI” 7
Closed loop PI control
152
Read and Write
“Pulse”
Display Drive
“Pulse” 0
“Quadrature” 1
[Pulse/Enc Scale]
This parameter contains the scaling factor for both pulse train inputs (TB2-7, 8) and encoder feedback speed regulation (TB3 terminals 31-36).
1. Encoder Feedback Operation
Enter actual encoder pulses per revolution
2. Pulse Train Input
Scale
Factor
=
Incoming Pulse Rate (Hz)
Desired Command Freq.
x
Motor Poles
2
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
46
Read and Write
Factor / Pulses per Rev
1024 PPR (64 PPR frn < 4.01)
1
4096
Pulse Train Example:
4 Pole Motor, 60 Hz = Max. Speed.
The 1336–MOD–N1 option outputs 64 Hz/Hz.
At full analog reference, the pulse output will be 60 Hz x 64 Hz/Hz = 3840 pulses/sec.
Pulse/Enc Scale
=
3840 Hz
60 Hz x
4 Poles
= 128
2
This value will create a command frequency of
60 Hz for full analog reference to the option.
[Maximum Speed]
This Parameter sets the output frequency at full frequency reference for:
1. Encoder feedback speed regulation.
2. All analog inputs to TB2 (remote pot, 0-10V &
0-20 mA).
NOTE: [Maximum Freq.] must be raised to allow operation or modulation above [Maximum Speed].
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
151
Read and Write
1 Hertz / Hertz x 10 (x 1 frn < 4.01)
400 Hz
0 Hz
400 Hz
[Motor Poles]
This parameter contains the number of motor magnetic poles. This value translates output frequency into actual motor RPM during closed loop operation. It is calculated from
[Motor NP Hertz] and [Motor NP RPM].
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
153
Read Only
1 Poles / Poles
5–46
Encoder Feedback
[Speed KI]
This parameter contains the integral gain value for the velocity loop during closed loop operation.
[Speed Error]
Programming
This parameter displays the difference between
[Freq Command] and feedback speed.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
165
Read and Write
Numeric / Gain x 100
100
0
20000
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
166
Read Only
0.01 Hertz / 32767 = Maximum Freq.
None
– 8.33% of [Base Frequency]
+ 8.33% of [Base Frequency]
[Speed Integral]
This parameter displays the integral value from the speed loop.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
167
Read Only
0.01 Hertz / 32767 = Maximum Freq.
None
–8.33% of [Base Frequency]
+ 8.33% of [Base Frequency]
[Speed Adder]
This parameter displays the amount of correction applied to the [Freq Command].
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
168
Read Only
0.01 Hertz / 32767 = Maximum Freq.
None
– 8.33% of [Base Frequency]
+ 8.33% of [Base Frequency]
[Motor NP RPM]
This value should be set to the motor nameplate rated RPM.
This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
177
Read and Write
1 RPM / RPM x 10 (x 1 frn < 4.01)
1750 RPM
60 RPM
24000 RPM
[Motor NP Hertz]
This value should be set to the motor nameplate rated frequency.
This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
[Pulse/Enc Hertz]
This parameter displays the frequency command present at pulse input terminals 7 & 8 of TB2 or at the encoder input terminals on TB3 (if present). This value is displayed whether or not this is the active frequency command.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
178
Read and Write
1 Hertz / Hertz x 10 (x 1 frn < 4.01)
60 Hz
1 Hz
400 Hz
63
Read Only
0.01 Hertz / 32767 = Maximum Freq
None
0.00 Hz
400.00 Hz
Programming
This group of parameters configures the Process PI Regulator.
5–47
Process PI
[Speed Control]
This parameter selects the type of speed modulation active in the drive.
This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is running.
Important: If encoder feedback closed loop speed regulation is required, “Encoder Fdbk” must be selected.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
77
Read and Write
“Slip Comp” (“No Control” frn < 4.01)
Display Drive
“No Control” 0
Frequency regulation
“Slip Comp” 1
Slip compensation
“Speed Droop” 2
Negative slip compensation
“PLL” 3
Phase lock loop (requires frn < 4.01)
“Encoder Fdbk” 4
Encoder feedback–closed loop
“Droop + Reg” 5
Enc. fdbk.–closed loop w/ active droop
“P Jump” 6
Traverse function
“Process PI” 7
Closed loop PI control
[PI Config]
This parameter sets and displays the configuration for the PI regulator.
Note: Reset Integrator (Int) is also available through a digital input. See Input Mode Selection in Chapter
2.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Spare
213
Read/Write
00000000
Inv Error – Changes sign of PI Error
Reset Int – Holds KI at zero
Zero Clamp – Prevents bidirectional operation
Sqrt Fdbk – Uses square root of PI feedback value
Set Output 0 0 0 0 1 1
Preload Int 0 0 1 1 0 0
PI Enable 0 1 0 1 0 1
Diagram 1 2 3
Diagram 2
Preload
Feed forward effect for more dynamic response
Diagram 3
Preload at Start
Output
Freq.
Diagram 1
Command
PI
Output
Time 0 3 6
Enable
9 12 15 18 21
Disable
24 27 30
Enable PI output integrates from zero – drive ramps to regulated frequency.
Disable PI output is forced to zero – drive ramps to unregulated frequency.
Preload
Preload
0 3 6
Enable
9 12 15 18 21
Disable
24 27 30
Enable PI output steps to preload and integrates from there – drive steps to preload and ramps from there.
Disable PI output is forced to zero - drive ramps to unregulated frequency.
Preload at Start
Better response for well defined systems
0
Preload
3 6
Enable
9 12 15 18 21
Disable
24 27 30
Enable PI output integrates from preload – drive ramps from preload.
Disable PI output is held at preload - drive ramps to unregulated speed (min. preload).
Note: Drive will step output equal to preload on start.
[PI Status]
This parameter displays the status of the Process PI regulator.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
214
Read Only
None
Enabled
Spares
5–48
Programming
Process PI
[PI Ref Select]
The source of the PI reference is selected with this parameter. The value from the selected reference is the “set point” for the Process PI regulator.
If using firmware version 4.01 and up, the drive is capable of responding to a loss of the 4-20 mA signal used as either a PI reference or PI feedback.
Response to loss of 4-20 mA signal is controlled by programming and requires the following: a) [Speed Control] must be set to “Process PI” and b) Either [PI Ref Select] or [PI Fdbk Select] must be set to “4-20 mA.”
If both of the above conditions are met, the signal loss response is controlled by the setting of [4-20 mA Loss Sel]. If this parameter is set to “Stop/Fault,” loss of input will cause the drive to stop and issue a
Hertz Err Fault. Loss of input while any other setting of [4-20 mA Loss Sel] is chosen will cause the drive to activate the alarm bit (bit 6 of [Drive Status] and bit 13 of [Drive Alarm]) and output programmed
[Minimum Freq].
No signal loss protection is offered for the 0-10V input.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
[PI Fdbk Select]
The source of the PI feedback is selected with this parameter. It identifies the input point for the process feedback device.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
215
Read/Write
“Preset 1”
Display Drive
“Adapter 1” 6
“Adapter 2” 7
“Adapter 3” 8
“Adapter 4” 9
“Adapter 5” 10
“Adapter 6” 11
“Preset 1-7” 12-18
“Remote Pot” 1
“0-10 Volt” 2
“4-20 mA” 3
“Pulse Ref” 4
“MOP” 5
[PI Reference]
This parameter displays the current value of the reference selected by [PI Ref Select].
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
216
Read/Write
“0-10 Volt”
Display Drive
“Adapter 1” 6
“Adapter 2” 7
“Adapter 3” 8
“Adapter 4” 9
“Adapter 5” 10
“Adapter 6” 11
“Preset 1-7” 12-18
“Remote Pot” 1
“0-10 Volt” 2
“4-20 mA” 3
“Pulse Ref” 4
“MOP” 5
217
Read Only
0.01 Hertz / 32767 = Maximum Freq Forward
None
–400.00 Hz
400.00 Hz
Programming
5–49
Process PI
[PI Feedback]
This parameter displays the current value of the reference selected by [PI Fdbk Select].
[PI Error]
The value of the error calculated by the PI loop. This value is the difference between [PI Reference] & [PI
Feedback] and determines the PI output.
[PI Output]
The current output of the PI loop is displayed with this parameter. This output is used as the speed command for process control or the speed adder for process trim.
[KI Process]
This parameter sets the integral gain of the process
PI loop.
[KP Process]
This parameter sets the proportional gain of the process PI loop.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
218
Read Only
0.01 Hertz / 32767 = Maximum Freq Forward
None
–400.00 Hz
400.00 Hz
219
Read Only
0.01 Hertz / 32767 = Maximum Freq Forward
None
–400.00 Hz
400.00 Hz
220
Read Only
0.01 Hertz / 32767 = Maximum Freq Forward
None
–400.00 Hz
400.00 Hz
221
Read/Write
NA / NA
128
0
1024
222
Read/Write
NA / NA
256
0
1024
[PI Neg Limit]
This parameter sets the lower (negative) limit of the
PI output.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
223
Read/Write
0.01 Hertz / 32767 = Maximum Freq Forward
–8.33% of [Maximum Freq]
–400.00 Hz
400.00 Hz
[PI Pos Limit]
This parameter sets the upper (positive) limit of the
PI output.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
224
Read/Write
0.01 Hertz / 32767 = Maximum Freq Forward
+8.33% of [Maximum Freq]
–400.00 Hz
400.00 Hz
5–50
Programming
Process PI
[PI Preload] – Firmware 4.01 & later
Sets the value used to preload the PI intergrator when “Set Output” or “Preload Int” bits equal “1” in
[PI Config].
Parameter Number 225
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Read/Write
0.01 Hertz /
±
32767 = Maximum Freq
0.00 Hz
– 8.33% of [Maximum Freq]
Maximum Value + 8.33% of [Maximum Freq]
PI Reference
Select
PI Reference pi reference
PI Feedback
Select pi feedback
PI Config.sqrt_fdbk
√
–
+
∑
PI Feedback
PI Config.inv_error
–1
PI Error
Integral Term = 0
PI + Clamp
Process KI s
+
PI Config.reset_int
+
∑
Process KP
PI – Clamp
PI Output
Speed
Adder
Compute
Speed
Parameter 65
Freq Command
Master Frequency Reference
Speed
Command
Accel
Control
Speed
Ramp
+
∑
+
PI Output
–32767
+32767
PI Config.zero_clamp
0
+32767
0 speed ramp>0
–32767
Output Frequency
Programming
5–51
This group of parameters defines basic motor control and is only available with firmware version 4.01 and up.
Motor Control
[Control Select] – Firmware 4.01 & later
Selects the motor control method for the drive. The default setting provides full stator flux control that is suitable for most applications.
Additional selections are offered to optimally tune performance:
•
Two volts/Hertz modes are available; one using simple voltage boost and one for complete configurability. These may be required for special motors or unmatched multi-motor installations.
•
The Economize mode offers all the advantages of stator flux control plus the added feature of an
“auto-economizer.” If a motor remains lightly loaded for a specified period of time, the drive will attempt to reduce output voltage (and therefore output kW) in order to reduce the energy
(operating) costs of the lightly loaded motor.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
Full Custom
Maximum
Motor Rated
Voltage
Base Voltage
Base Frequency
Maximum Voltage
Maximum Frequency
Start Boost
0
0
Break Voltage
Break Frequency
Frequency
Motor Rated Maximum
9
Read and Write
“Sens Vector”
Display Drive
“Economize” 0
Stator Flux control with Economize
“Sens Vector” 1
Stator Flux control
“Fixed Boost” 2
V/Hz w/programmed accel/run boost
“Full Custom” 3
V/Hz with full configuration
Fixed
Voltage
Base Voltage
Base Frequency
Start Boost
Run Boost
0
0
A
B
Frequency
Fan Select 1 & 2/No Boost
100%
Base
Voltage
No Boost
50%
42%
35%
Fan 2
Fan 1
0
0 50%
Base Frequency
100%
[Flux Amps Ref] – Firmware 4.01 & later
Used in Sensorless Vector mode only – Sets the value of amps required to maintain full motor flux. If set to zero, the drive will use an internal value based on [Motor NP Amps] and drive kW (HP). Refer to
Chapter 4 for setup information.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
192
Read and Write
0.1 Amp / 4096 = Drive Rated Amps
0.0 Amps
0.0 Amps
75.0% of Drive VT Rated Amps
5–52
Programming
Motor Control
[IR Drop Volts] – Firmware 4.01 & later
Used in Sensorless Vector mode only – Sets the value of volts dropped across the resistance of the motor stator. If set to zero, the drive will use an internal value based on motor F.L.A. and rated voltage. Some motors (i.e. 6 pole, special, etc.) may be particularly sensitive to the adjustment of this parameter. Refer to the tuning procedure in Chapter
4 for further information.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
194
Read and Write
1 Volt / 4096 = Drive Rated Volts
0 Volts
0 Volts
25% of Drive Rated Volts
[Flux Up Time] – Firmware 4.01 & later
Sets the amount of time the drive will use to try and achieve full motor stator flux. When a Start command is issued, DC current at current limit level is used to build stator flux before accelerating.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
200
Read and Write
0.1 Sec / Sec x 10
0.0 Sec
0.0 Sec
5.0 Sec
[Start Boost]
This parameter sets the DC start boost level for acceleration when [DC Boost Select] is set to “Fixed” or “Full Custom.”
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
48
Read and Write
1 Volt / 4096 = Drive Rtd Volts
0 Volts
0 Volts
9.5% of Drive Rated Voltage
[Run Boost]
This parameter sets the DC boost level for constant speed level when [DC Boost Select] is set to “Fixed”.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
83
Read and Write
1 Volt / 4096 = Drive Rtd Volts
0 Volts
0 Volts
9.5% of Drive Rated Voltage
[Boost Slope] – Firmware 4.01 & later
Sets the slope of the volts/Hertz curve from zero
Hertz to the intersect point (see Fixed boost diagram above). The slope is determined by multiplying:
Run Boost x Boost Slope = A
Start Boost x Boost Slope = B.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
169
Read and Write
None
1.5
1.0
8.0
[Break Voltage]
Sets the voltage the drive will output at [Break
Frequency]. Combined with [Break Frequency], this parameter determines the volts-per-Hertz pattern between 0 and [Break Frequency].
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
50
Read and Write
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
1 Volt / 4096 = Drive Rtd Volts
25% of Drive Rated Voltage
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
0 Volts
50% of Drive Rated Voltage
[Break Frequency]
This parameter sets a midpoint frequency on a custom volts-per-Hertz curve. Combined with [Break
Voltage], this value determines the volts-per-Hertz ratio between 0 and [Break Frequency].
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
49
Read and Write
1 Hertz / Hertz x 10 (x 1 frn < 4.01)
25% of [Maximum Freq]
0 Hz
120 Hz
Important: Please note the resolution change with Frn 4.01.
Programming
Motor Control
[Base Voltage]
This value should be set to the motor nameplate rated voltage.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
18
Read and Write
1 Volt / 4096 = Drive Rtd Volts
Drive Rated Volts
25% of Drive Rated Voltage
120% of Drive Rated Voltage
5–53
[Base Frequency]
This value should be set to the motor nameplate rated frequency.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
17
Read and Write
1 Hertz / Hertz x 10 (x 1 frn < 4.01)
60 Hz
25 Hz
400 Hz
Important: Please note the resolution change with Frn 4.01.
[Maximum Voltage]
This parameter sets the highest voltage the drive will output.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
20
Read and Write
1 Volt / 4096 = Drive Rtd Volts
Drive Rated Volts
25% of Drive Rated Voltage
120% of Drive Rated Voltage
5–54
Programming
Linear List
This group lists all the parameters currently installed in your drive in numerical order. Refer to the Appendix at the back of this manual for an alpha/numeric listing of all parameters.
[Power Dip Restart]
This parameter is only used with the two–wire control mode. If enabled, a 20 ms delay is added to the Start command when the Stop and Start commands are applied simultaneously following a power loss condition.
1336 PLUS Adjustable Frequency AC Drives with a Firmware
Revision Number (FRN) of “5.xx.” have the following additional parameters:
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Factory Default
Units
241
Read and Write
“Disabled”
Display Drive
“Disabled” 0
“Enabled” 1
[Stability Gain]
This parameter adjusts the gain of the torque component of current to adjust for possible current instability in certain motors caused by variations in design. Increasing this value to the correct setting for a particular motor will stabilize torque pulsations in the motor.
Important: Setting this value too high may cause additional instability. It should be set for the lowest value that eliminates the instability.
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
Display Units / Drive Units
Factory Default
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
246
Read and Write
None
0
0
16
Fault Descriptions
Chapter
6
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6 provides information to guide the user in troubleshooting the 1336 PLUS. Included is a listing and description of the various drive faults (with possible solutions, when applicable) and alarms.
Fault Display
The LCD display is used to indicate a fault by showing a brief text statement relating to the fault (see figure below). The fault will be displayed until “Clear Faults” is initiated or drive power is cycled. A
Series A (version 3.0) or Series B HIM will display a fault when it occurs, no matter what state the display is in. In addition, a listing of past faults can be displayed by selecting “Fault queue” from the
Control Status menu (see Chapter 3 for more information). Refer to
Table 6.A for a listing and description of the various faults. Table 6.B
provides a listing of faults by number.
Clearing a Fault
When a fault occurs, the cause must be corrected before the fault can be cleared. After corrective action has been taken, simply cycling drive power will clear the fault. Issuing a valid Stop command from the HIM or Control Interface option (TB3) will also clear a fault if the [Flt Clear Mode] parameter is set to “Enabled.” In addition, a
“Clear Faults” command can be issued anytime from a serial device
(if connected).
Contact Description
Refer to Figure 2.3 for a schematic representation of contacts
CR1-CR4. Contacts in Figure 2.3 are shown in an unpowered state.
When powered, the contacts will change state. For Example: During normal operating conditions (no faults present, drive running), the
CR3 Fault contacts (default setting in firmware versions 4.01 & up) at TB2-13 & 14 are open, and the contacts at TB2-14 & 15 are closed. When a fault occurs, the state of these contacts will change.
6–2
Troubleshooting
02
BGND 10ms Over
51
Blwn Fuse Flt
58
Diag C Lim Flt
36
Drive Fault Reset
22
EE Init Read
53
EE Init Value
54
EEprom Checksum
66
EEprom Fault
32
FGND 10ms Over
52
Table 6.A
1336 PLUS Fault Descriptions
Name & Fault #
Adptr Freq Err
65
Auxiliary Fault
Drive –> HIM
Description
The SCANport adapter that was the selected frequency reference sent a frequency greater than 32767 to the drive.
The auxiliary input interlock is open.
Action
Correct the problem that is causing the SCANport adapter to send the illegal frequency reference to the drive.
If Control Interface option is installed, check connections at
TB3-24. If option is not installed, set [Input Mode] to “1.”
Replace Main Control Board or complete drive as required.
Microprocessor loop fault.
Occurs if the 10ms background task hasn’t been run in 15 ms.
If the difference between the commanded voltage and the measured voltage is greater than 1/8 of rated voltage for 0.5
seconds, then a fault will be issued indicating that the bus fuse in 30 kW (40 HP) and up drives has blown.
The drive output current has exceeded the hardware current limit and the [Cur Lim Trip En] parameter was enabled.
Locate cause, replace fuse.
Check programming of [Cur Lim
Trip En] parameter. Check for excess load, improper DC boost setting, DC brake volts set too high or other causes of excess current.
Check/verify wiring and contact operation.
Power-up has been attempted with an Open Stop contact or
Closed Start contact.
Error 1 – The checksum read from the EEPROM does not match the checksum calculated from the EEPROM data.
1. Gate Drive Bd. replacement
(requires re-initialization).
2. Trouble reading EEPROM during initialization.
Stored parameter value out of range on initialization.
The checksum read from the
EEPROM does not match the checksum calculated from the
EEPROM data.
EEPROM is being programmed and will not write a new value.
Microprocessor loop fault.
Occurs if a 10ms interrupt is pending before the current interrupt is complete.
Repeat operation. Replace HIM.
1. Reset to factory defaults & cycle input power.
2. Check all connections to Power/
Driver Board. Replace board or complete drive as needed.
1. Reset to factory defaults & cycle input power.
2. Check all connections to the
Power/Driver Bd. Replace the board or complete drive as needed.
1. Reset to factory defaults & cycle input power.
2. Check all wire and cable connections to the Power Driver
Board. Replace Power Driver
Board or complete drive as required.
Check all wire and cable connections to the Main Control Board.
Replace Main Control Board or complete drive as required.
Replace Main Control Board or complete drive as required.
Troubleshooting
6–3
Name & Fault #
Ground Fault
13
Ground Warning
57
Hertz Err Fault
29
Hertz Sel Fault
30
HIM –> Drive
Loop Overrn Flt
23
Max Retries Fault
33
Motor Mode Flt
24
Description
A current path to earth ground in excess of 100A has been detected at one or more of the drive output terminals. NOTE: If ground current exceeds 220% of drive rated current,
“Overcurrent Flt” may occur instead of Ground Fault.
A current path to earth ground in excess of 2A has been detected at one or more of the drive output terminals. See
[Ground Warning].
This fault indicates that there is not a valid operating frequency.
It can be caused by any of the following:
1. [Maximum Freq] is less than
[Minimum Freq].
2. Skip frequencies and skip bandwidth eliminate all operating frequencies.
3. 4-20mA input signal speed reference has been lost and
[4-20mA Loss Sel] is set for
“Stop-Fault.”
A frequency select parameter has been programmed with an out of range value.
Error 1 – The checksum read from the EEPROM does not match the checksum calculated from the EEPROM data.
Error 2 – Number of parameters in saved profile does not equal master.
Error 3 – Download was attempted to a different type drive
(i.e. 1336–>1305).
Error 4 – Saved data not correct for new drive.
Error 5 – Drive is running while attempting download.
An overrun of the 2.5ms control loop has occurred.
Drive unsuccessfully attempted to reset a fault and resume running for the programmed number of [Reset/Run Tries].
A fault has been detected originating from the Control
Board.
Action
Check the motor and external wiring to the drive output terminals for a grounded condition.
Check the motor and external wiring to the drive output terminals for a grounded condition.
1. Check [Minimum Freq] and
[Maximum Freq] parameters.
2. Check [Skip Freq 1], [Skip Freq
2], [Skip Freq 3] and [Skip Freq
Band] parameters.
3. Check for broken wires, loose connections or transducer loss at 4-20mA input, TB2.
Reprogram [Freq Select 1] and/or
[Freq Select 2] with a correct value.
If problem persists, replace Main
Control Board or complete drive.
Retry download. Replace HIM.
Retry download. Replace HIM.
Download can only take place with same type drive.
Capabilities of drive different then master drive. Reprogram param.
Stop drive, then perform download.
Check all connections to the
Power/Driver Board. Replace the board or complete drive as needed.
Check fault buffer for fault code requiring reset. Correct the cause of the fault and manually clear by pressing the local Stop key or cycling the TB3 Stop input.
Check all connections to the
Control Board. Replace the board,
Language Module or complete drive as required.
6–4
Troubleshooting
Name & Fault #
Motor Stall Fault
06
Neg Slope Fault
35
Open Pot Fault
09
Op Error Fault
11
Overcurrent Flt
12
Overload Fault
07
Overtemp Fault
08
Overvolt Fault
05
Phase U Fault
38
Description
Current remained over 150% of
[Rated Amps] for more than 4 seconds.
Drive software detected a portion of the volts/hertz curve with a negative slope.
Action
If the motor is drawing excessive current (over 150%), the motor load is excessive and will not allow the drive to accelerate to set speed. A longer accel time or a reduced load may be required.
Check drive programming.
*1.[Maximum Voltage] parameter must be greater than [Base
Voltage].
*2.[Maximum Freq] parameter must be greater than [Base Frequency].
3. [Base Voltage] parameter must be greater than [Start Boost].
4. If the [DC Boost Select] parameter is set to “Full Custom,” [Base
Voltage] must be greater than
[Break Voltage] and [Break
Voltage] must be greater than
[Start Boost].
* Firmware versions before 2.01 only.
Check the external potentiometer circuit at TB2, terminals 1, 2 and 3 for an open circuit.
An external pot is connected and the common side of the pot is open. The drive generates this fault when the voltage between TB2-2 and TB2-3 exceeds 3.9V DC.
A SCANport device requests a
Read or Write of a data type not supported. This will also occur if:
1. [Motor Type] is set to “Sync
PM” and [Stop Mode Used] is set to “DC Brake”, or
2. [Motor Type] is set to “Sync
Reluc” or “Sync PM” and
[Speed Control] is set to
“Slip Comp”.
Overcurrent is detected in instantaneous overcurrent trip circuit.
DC bus voltage exceeded maximum value.
A phase to ground fault has been detected between the drive and motor in this phase.
Check programming.
Internal electronic overload trip.
An excessive motor load exists. It must be reduced such that drive output current does not exceed the current set by the [Overload Amps] parameter.
Heat sink temperature exceeds a predefined value of 90
°
C
(195
°
F).
Check for a short circuit at the drive output or excessive load conditions at the motor.
Check for blocked or dirty heat sink fins. Check that the ambient temperature has not exceeded 40
°
C (104
°
F).
Monitor the AC line for high line voltage or transient conditions.
Bus overvoltage can also be caused by motor regeneration.
Extend the decel time or install dynamic brake option.
Check the wiring between the drive and motor. Check motor for grounded phase.
Troubleshooting
6–5
Name & Fault #
Phase V Fault
39
Phase W Fault
40
P Jump Err Flt
37
Poles Calc Flt
50
Power Loss Fault
03
Power Mode Fault
26
Power Overload
64
Power Test Flt
46
Precharge Fault
19
Precharge Open
56
Description
A phase to ground fault has been detected between the drive and motor in this phase.
A phase to ground fault has been detected between the drive and motor in this phase.
Reserved for future use.
Action
Check the wiring between the drive and motor. Check motor for grounded phase.
Check the wiring between the drive and motor. Check motor for grounded phase.
Generated if the calculated value of [Motor Poles] is less than 2 or greater than 32.
DC bus voltage remained below 85% of nominal for longer than 500ms. [Line Loss
Fault] parameter is set to
“enabled.”
The internal power mode variable received an incorrect value.
Check [Motor NP RPM] and [Motor
NP Hertz] programming.
Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or line power interruption.
The drive rating of 150% for 1 minute has been exceeded.
The internal power mode variable received an incorrect value.
The precharge device was open 20ms after the end of a line loss condition or the bus charging alarm remains on for
20 seconds (precharge did not complete).
The precharge circuit was commanded to close, but was detected to be open.
Check all connections to the
Control Board. Replace the board,
Language Module or complete drive as required.
Reduce load.
Check all connections to the
Power/Driver Board. Replace the board or complete drive as needed.
See Chapter 1 for frame definitions.
1.Frames A1, A2, A3 – Check the precharge circuit. Replace the precharge NTC or complete drive as needed.
2. Frame B – Check the precharge circuit. Replace the precharge transistor, Power Driver Board or complete drive as required.
3. All larger frames – Check the precharge circuit. Replace the input SCRs, SCR Firing Board,
Power Driver Board or complete drive as needed.
See page 1–1 for frame definitions.
1.Frames A1, A2, A3 – Check the precharge circuit. Replace the precharge NTC or complete drive as needed.
2. Frame B – Check the precharge circuit. Replace the precharge transistor, Power Driver Board or complete drive as required.
3. All larger frames – Check the precharge circuit. Replace the input SCRs, SCR Firing Board,
Power Driver Board or complete drive as needed.
6–6
Troubleshooting
Name & Fault #
Reprogram Fault
48
ROM or RAM Flt
68
Run Boost Fault
34
Serial Fault
10
Shear Pin Fault
63
Temp Sense Open
55
Undervolt Fault
04
UV Short Fault
41
UW Short Fault
42
VW Short Fault
43
Xsistr Desat Flt
47
(Frame Size C & Above)
Description
The drive was commanded to write default values to
EEPROM.
Internal power-up ROM or RAM tests have not executed properly.
An attempt has been made to set the [Run Boost] parameter to a value greater than the
[Start Boost] parameter.
A SCANport adapter has been disconnected and the [Logic
Mask] bit for that adapter is set to “1.”
Action
1. Clear the fault or cycle power to the drive.
2. Program the drive parameters as needed.
Important: If [Input Mode] has been changed from its original value, power must be cycled before the new value will take affect.
Check Language Module. Replace
Control Board or complete drive as required.
Verify that parameter has been programmed correctly.
1. If no adapter was intentionally disconnected, check wiring to the SCANport adapters. Replace wiring, SCANport expander, SCANport adapters, Main
Control Board or complete drive as required.
2. If an adapter was intentionally disconnected and the [Logic
Mask] bit for that adapter is set to “1”, this fault will occur. To guard against this fault occurring, set the [Logic Mask] bit for the adapter to “0.”
Check load requirements and
[Current Limit] setting.
Programmed [Current Limit] amps has been exceeded and
[Shear Pin Fault] is enabled.
Heat sink thermistor is open or malfunctioning.
DC Bus voltage fell below the minimum value (388V DC at
460V AC input). [Line Loss
Fault] and [Low Bus Fault] set to “enabled.”
Excessive current has been detected between these two output terminals.
Excessive current has been detected between these two output terminals.
Excessive current has been detected between these two output terminals.
One or more of the output transistors were operating in the active region instead of desaturation. This can be caused by excessive transistor current or insufficient base drive voltage.
Check thermistor and connections.
Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or line power interruption.
Check the motor and external wiring to the drive output terminals for a shorted condition.
Check the motor and external wiring to the drive output terminals for a shorted condition.
Check the motor and external wiring to the drive output terminals for a shorted condition.
Check for damaged output transistors. Replace output transistors, Power Driver Board or complete drive as needed.
Troubleshooting
Table 6.B
Fault Code Cross Reference
Fault #
65
66
68
56
57
58
59-62
63
64
53
54
55
50
51
52
46
47
48
41
42
43
38
39
40
35
36
37
32
33
34
29
30
31
24
26
28
19
22
23
11
12
13
08
09
10
05
06
07
02
03
04
Display Name
Neg Slope Fault
Diag C Lim Flt
P Jump Err Flt
Phase U Fault
Phase V Fault
Phase W Fault
UV Short Fault
UW Short Fault
VW Short Fault
Power Test Flt
Xsistr Desat Flt
Reprogram Fault
Pole Calc Fault
BGND 10ms Over
FGND 10ms Over
EE Init Read
EE Init Value
Temp Sense Open
Precharge Open
Ground Warning
Blwn Fuse Flt
Reserved for Future Use
Shear Pin Fault
Power Overload
Adptr Freq Err
EEprom Checksum
ROM or RAM Flt
Auxiliary Fault
Power Loss Fault
Undervolt Fault
Overvolt Fault
Motor Stall Fault
Overload Fault
Overtemp Fault
Open Pot Fault
Serial Fault
Op Error Fault
Overcurrent Flt
Ground Fault
Precharge Fault
Drive Fault Reset
Loop Overrn Flt
Motor Mode Flt
Power Mode Fault
Timeout Fault
Hertz Err Fault
Hertz Sel Fault
Timeout Fault
EEprom Fault
Max Retries Fault
Run Boost Fault
No
No
No
No
No
Reset/Run
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
6–7
6–8
Alarms
Troubleshooting
Table 6.C presents a listing and description of the drive alarms.
Alarm status can be viewed by selecting the [Drive Alarm] parameter. An active alarm will be indicated by its corresponding bit being set to high (1). Any high bit (1) will energize CR4 (see figure 2.3).
Parameter Number
Parameter Type
60
Read Only
Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Auto Reset
Motor OL Trip
4-20 mA Loss
Voltage Check
Unused
Heatsink Temp
Auxiliary Input
Ground Warning
Motoring Current Limit
Regenerating Current Limit
Regenerating Voltage Limit
Line Loss In Progress
Mtr Overload
Motor Stalled
Bus Charging
Hardware Current Limit
Table 6.C
Alarm Conditions
Alarm Name
Bus Charging
Description
Precharge of DC bus capacitors is in progress.
Hardware Current Limit
Motoring Current Limit
An alarm will be issued when 220% of drive rated current is reached.
The value programmed for [Current Limit] has been exceeded while in the motoring mode.
Regenerating Current Limit An alarm will be issued when the value set for [Current
Limit] has been exceeded while the motor is regenerating.
Regenerating Voltage Limit Bus limiting is active.
Line Loss In Progress An alarm will be issued when the AC incoming voltage drops below 20% of input or a 150 volt drop takes place.
Mtr Overload
Motor Stalled
Ground Warning
At the present value of output amps, a motor overload trip will eventually occur.
The drive output frequency folds to 0 Hz and current limit is still active or voltage limit will not allow decel.
Ground current exceeds 2 amperes.
Auxiliary Input
Heatsink Temp
Voltage Check
4-20mA Loss
Motor OL Trip
Auto Reset
TB3 terminal 24 circuit is open.
Temperature of drive heatsink has exceeded its limit.
Voltage at drive output terminals is equal to, or greater than
10% of drive rated volts (i.e. 46V for 460V drive) when
Start command is issued and flying start is disabled. Drive will not start until terminal voltage falls below 10% of drive rating or flying start is enabled.
4-20mA signal lost.
This bit will be high when the motor overload function has integrated high enough to cause a motor overload fault.
This bit is active regardless of the [Motor Overload] state
(enabled/disabled).
Drive is attempting to reset a fault using [Reset/Run Tries]
& [Reset/Run Time].
Specifications
Appendix
A
Specifications and
Supplemental Information
Appendix A provides specifications and supplemental information including a parameter cross reference and derate information.
Protection
AC Input Overvoltage Trip:
AC Input Undervoltage Trip:
Bus Overvoltage Trip:
Bus Undervoltage Trip:
Nominal Bus Voltage:
Heat Sink Thermistor:
200-240V Drive 380-480V Drive 500-600V Drive
285V AC
138V AC
405V DC
200V DC
324V DC
570V AC
280V AC
810V DC
400V DC
648V DC
690V AC
343V AC
975V DC
498V DC
810V DC
Monitored by microprocessor overtemp trip.
Drive Overcurrent Trip
Software Current Limit:
Hardware Current Limit:
20 to 160% of VT rated current.
180 to 250% of VT rated current (dependent on drive rating).
Instantaneous Current Limit: 220 to 300% of VT rated current (dependent on drive rating).
Line transients:
Control Logic Noise Immunity: up to 6000 volts peak per IEEE C62.41-1991.
Showering arc transients up to 1500 volts peak
2
.
Power Ride-Thru:
Logic Control Ride-Thru:
Ground Fault Trip:
Short Circuit Trip:
15 milliseconds at full load.
0.5 seconds minimum, 2 seconds typical.
Phase-to-ground on drive output.
Phase-to-phase on drive output.
Environment
Altitude:
Relative Humidity:
Shock:
Vibration:
Agency Certification:
1000 m (3300 ft) max. without derating.
Ambient Operating Temperature
IP00, Open:
IP20, NEMA Type 1 Enclosed:
IP54, NEMA Type 12 Enclosed:
IP65, NEMA Type 4 Enclosed:
0 to 50 degrees C (32 to 122 degrees F).
0 to 40 degrees C (32 to 104 degrees F).
0 to 40 degrees C (32 to 104 degrees F).
0 to 40 degrees C (32 to 104 degrees F).
Storage Temperature (all constructions): –40 to 70 degrees C (–40 to 158 degrees F).
5 to 95% non-condensing.
15G peak for 11ms duration (
±
1.0ms).
0.006 inches (0.152 mm) displacement, 1G peak.
U.L. Listed
CSA Certified
IL S
T
E D 5 6
L
6
I
N
D
C
O N
T
E
Q
IL S
T
E D 5 6
L
6
I
N
D
C
O N
T
E
Q
Marked for all applicable directives
1
Emissions EN 50081-1
EN 50081-2
EN 55011 Class A
EN 55011 Class B
Immunity EN 50082-1
EN 50082-2
IEC 801-1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8 per EN 50082-1, 2
Low Voltage EN 60204-1
PREN 50178
1
Note: Installation guidelines called out in Appendix C must be adhered to.
2
Excludes Pulse Train Input.
A–2
Specifications and Supplemental Information
Electrical
Input Data
Voltage Tolerance:
Frequency Tolerance:
Input Phases:
–10% of minimum, +10% of maximum.
48-62 Hz.
Three-phase input provides full rating for all drives.
Single-phase operation is possible for A & B Frame drives at a derating of 50%.
Displacement Power Factor
A1-A3 Frame Drives:
A4 Frame & Up Drives:
Efficiency:
0.80 standard, 0.95 with optional inductor.
0.95 standard.
97.5% at rated amps, nominal line volts.
Max. Short Circuit Current Rating: 200,000A rms symmetrical, 600 volts (when used with AC input line fuses specified in Chapter 2).
Control
Method: Sine coded PWM with programmable carrier frequency. Ratings apply to all drives (refer to the Derating Guidelines on page A–5).
A Frame Drives
B Frame Drives
2-10 kHz. Drive rating based on 4 kHz (see pg. 1–1 for frame info).
2-8 kHz. Drive rating based on 4 kHz (see pg. 1–1 for frame info).
C & D Frame Drives 2-6 kHz. Drive rating based on 4 kHz (see pg. 1–1 for frame info).
E Frame Drives & Up 2-6 kHz. Drive rating based on 2 kHz (see pg. 1–1 for frame info).
Output Voltage Range: 0 to rated voltage.
Output Frequency Range: 0 to 400 Hz.
Frequency Accuracy
Digital Input:
Analog Input:
Within
±
0.01% of set output frequency.
Within
±
0.4% of maximum output frequency.
Selectable Motor Control: Sensorless Vector with full tuning. Standard V/Hz with full custom capability.
Accel/Decel: Two independently programmable accel and decel times. Each time may be programmed from 0 - 3600 seconds
1
in 0.1 second increments
2
.
Intermittent Overload: Constant Torque – 150% of rated output for 1 minute.
Variable Torque – 115% of rated output for 1 minute.
Current Limit Capability: Proactive Current Limit programmable from 20 to 160% of rated output current. Independently programmable proportional and integral gain.
Inverse Time Overload Cap. Class 10 protection with speed sensitive response. Investigated by
U.L. to comply with N.E.C. Article 430. U.L. File E59272, volume 4/6.
1
600 seconds with Firmware Versions before 4.01.
2
0.1 second increments using a HIM or 0.01 with serial communications.
Input/Output Ratings
Each 1336 PLUS Drive has constant and variable torque capabilities. The listings on the next page provide input & output current and kVA ratings.
Note: Drive ratings are at nominal values. See Derating Guidelines on page A–5.
Specifications and Supplemental Information
A–3
Cat. No.
200-240V DRIVES
AQF05
AQF07
AQF10
AQF15
AQF20
AQF30
AQF50
A007
A010
A015
A020
A025
A030
A040
A050
A060
A075
A100
A125
380-480V DRIVES
BRF05
BRF07
BRF10
BRF15
BRF20
BRF30
BRF50
BRF75
BRF100
Constant Torque
Input kVA Input Amps
1.1
1.4
2.2
2.9
3.9
5.7
8.5
10-12
12-14
17-20
22-26
26-31
27-33
41-49
52-62
62-74
82-99
100-120
112-134
0.9-1.0
1.3-1.6
1.7-2.1
2.2-2.6
3.0-3.7
4.2-5.1
6.6-8.0
9.5-11.6
12.2-14.7
28
35
49
63
75
79
119
149
178
238
289
322
2.8
3.5
5.4
7.3
9.7
14.3
21.3
1.3
2.0
2.6
3.3
4.6
6.4
10.0
14.5
18.5
Output kVA
26
31
32
48
60
11
14
19
72
96
116
129
0.9
1.2
1.8
2.4
3.2
4.8
7.2
0.9
1.3
1.7
2.2
3.0
4.2
6.7
11.2
13.9
Output Amps
27
34
48
65
77
80
120
150
180
240
291
325
2.3
3.0
4.5
6.0
8.0
12
18
1.1
1.6
2.1
2.8
3.8
5.3
8.4
14.0
17.5
Variable Torque
Input kVA
1.1
1.4
2.2
2.9
3.9
5.7
8.5
10-12
12-14
17-20
22-26
26-31
27-33
41-49
52-62
62-74
82-99
100-120
112-134
0.9-1.1
1.4-1.7
1.8-2.2
2.3-2.8
3.2-3.8
4.7-5.7
7.0-8.5
12.2-14.7
17.1-20.7
Input Amps
28
35
49
63
75
79
119
149
178
238
289
322
2.8
3.5
5.4
7.3
9.7
14.3
21.3
1.4
2.1
2.8
3.5
4.8
7.2
10.7
18.5
26.0
Output kVA
26
31
32
48
60
11
14
19
72
96
116
129
0.9
1.2
1.8
2.4
3.2
4.8
7.2
1.0
1.4
1.8
2.4
3.2
4.8
7.2
13.9
19.9
Output Amps
27
34
48
65
77
80
120
150
180
240
291
325
2.3
3.0
4.5
6.0
8.0
12
18
1.2
1.7
2.3
3.0
4.0
6.0
9.0
17.5
25.0
B150
B200
B250
BP250
BX250
B300
BP300
B350
BP350
B400
B007
B010
B015
B020
B025
B030
BX040
B040
B050
BX060
1
B060
B075
B100
B125
BX150
BP400
B450
BP450
B500
B600
500-600V DRIVES
CWF10
CWF20
CWF30
CWF50
C007
C010
C015
C020
C025
C030
C040
C050
C060
C075
C100
C125
C150
2
C200
2
C250
CX300
C300
C350
C400
C450
2
C500
2
C600
2
347
357
397
421
446
197
261
322
322
322
471
496
527
565
664
58
73
75
82
105
137
172
178
13
17
25
32
40
46
61
130-164
172-217
212-268
212-268
212-268
228-288
235-297
261-330
277-350
294-371
8-11
11-14
16-21
21-26
26-33
30-38
40-50
38-48
48-60
62
54-68
69-87
90-114
113-143
148
310-392
326-412
347-438
372-470
437-552
2.1-2.5
4.2-5.0
6.2-7.5
8.3-10.0
9-11
11-13
17-20
21-26
27-32
31-37
38-45
48-57
52-62
73-88
94-112
118-142
144-173
216-260
244-293
256-307
258-309
301-361
343-412
386-464
429-515
515-618
84
108
137
167
250
19
25
31
36
44
55
60
2.4
4.8
7.2
9.6
10
12
282
295
297
347
397
446
496
595
85
109
137
167
252
19
24
30
35
45
57
62
2.1
4.2
6.2
8.3
10
12
283
297
299
349
398
448
498
598
360
360
425
425
475
199
263
325
325
325
475
525
532
590
670
60
75
77
85
106
138
173
180
12.5
16.1
24.2
31
39
45
59
279
287
319
339
359
159
210
259
259
259
378
398
424
454
534
48
60
61
68
84
110
138
143
10
13
19
25
31
36
47
85
109
138
158
252
19
24
30
35
45
57
62
2.0
4.0
6.0
8.0
10
12
284
300
300
350
400
450
500
600
319
339
359
378
398
191
233
259
287
279
424
454
424
534
534
52
61
61
76
96
120
143
143
11
17
22
27
33
38
47
397
421
446
471
496
238
290
322
357
347
527
565
527
664
664
63
75
75
93
119
149
178
178
14
22
28
35
43
49
61
157-198
191-241
212-268
235-297
228-288
261-330
277-350
294-371
310-392
326-412
9-12
14-18
18-23
23-29
28-36
32-41
40-50
41-52
49-62
62
61-77
78-99
98-124
117-148
148
347-438
372-470
347-438
437-552
437-552
2.1-2.5
4.2-5.0
6.2-7.5
8.3-10.0
9-11
11-13
17-20
21-26
27-32
31-37
38-45
48-57
52-62
73-88
94-112
118-142
144-173
216-260
244-293
256-307
258-309
301-361
343-412
386-464
429-515
515-618
84
108
137
167
250
19
25
31
36
44
55
60
2.4
4.8
7.2
9.6
10
12
282
295
297
347
397
446
496
595
85
109
137
167
251
19
24
30
35
45
57
62
2.1
4.2
6.2
8.3
10
12
283
297
299
349
398
448
498
598
85
109
138
158
252
19
24
30
35
45
57
62
2.0
4.0
6.0
8.0
10
12
284
300
300
350
400
450
500
600
1
480 Volts Only.
2
In firmware versions 2.04 and below, the factory default PWM frequency is 4 kHz. Drive must be reprogrammed to 2 kHz to achieve current ratings listed.
425
425
475
475
525
240
292
325
360
360
532
590
532
670
670
65
77
77
96
120
150
180
180
14
21
27
34
42
48
59
A–4
Specifications and Supplemental Information
User Supplied Enclosures
1
2
3
4
5
6
Base Derate Amps are based on nominal voltage (240, 480 or 600V). If input voltage exceeds Drive Rating, Drive Output must be derated. Refer to Figure CC.
Rating is at 4 kHz (2 kHz for 224–448 kW/300–600 HP, 500–600V). If carrier frequencies above 4 kHz are selected, drive rating must be derated. See Figures A–AA.
Drive Ambient Temperature Rating is 40
°
C. If ambient exceeds 40
°
C, the drive must be derated. Refer to Figures A–AA.
Drive Rating is based on altitudes of 1,000 m
(3,000 ft) or less. If installed at higher altitude, drive must be derated Refer to Figure BB.
Important: Two (2) 725 CFM fans are required if an open type drive is mounted in a user supplied enclosure.
Not available at time of printing.
Figure U
Figure U
Figure U
Figure U
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
6
Figure G
Figure I
Figure K
Figure V
Figure W
Figure X
Figure Y
Figure Z/AA
Figure Z/AA
Figure Z/AA
Figure Z/AA
Figure Z/AA
Figure Z/AA
Figure A
Figure A
Figure A
Figure A
Figure A
Figure A
Figure A
Figure A
Figure A
None
None
None
Figure B
Figure C
Figure D
Figure E
Figure E
Figure F
Figure F
None
Figure G
Figure H
Figure J
Figure J
Figure L
Figure M
Figure N
Figure O
None
None
Figure P
None
Figure Q
None
Figure R
None
Figure S
Figure T
Figure T
Derate
Curve
2, 3
Figure A
Figure A
Figure A
Figure A
Figure A
Figure A
Figure A
None
Figure B
Figure D
None
None
None
Figure G
Figure H
Figure J
Figure L
Figure M
Figure N
1336 plus drives installed in user supplied enclosures may be mounted within an enclosure or may be mounted to allow the heat sink to extend outside the enclosure. Use the information below in combination with the enclosure manufacturer’s guidelines for sizing.
CW10
CW20
CW30
CW50
C125
C150
C200
C250
CX300
C300
5
C350
5
C400
5
C450
5
C500
5
C600
5
C007
C010
C015
C020
C025
C030
C040
C050
C060
C075
C100
BX060
B060
B075
B100
B125
BX150
B150
B200
B250
BP250
BX250
B300
BP300
B350
BP350
B400
BP400
B450
BP450
B500
5
B600
5
B007
B010
B015
B020
B025
B030
BX040
B040
B050
500-600V DRIVES
292
325
322
360
425
357
475
77
96
120
150
180
180
240
421
525
471
590
527
670
670
42
48
59
65
77
14
21
27
34
2.4
4.8
7.2
9.6
138
158
252
284
300
300
350
30
35
45
57
10
12
19
24
62
85
109
400
450
500
600
Cat No.
200-240V DRIVES
Base Derate
Amps
1
AQF05
AQF07
AQF10
AQF15
AQF20
AQF30
AQF50
2.3
3.0
4.5
6.0
8.0
12
18
A007
A010
A015
A020
A025
A030
A040
A050
A060
A075
A100
A125
380-480V DRIVES
BRF05
BRF07
BRF10
BRF15
BRF20
BRF30
BRF50
BRF75
BRF100
1.2
1.7
2.3
3.0
4.0
6.0
9.0
17.5
25.0
27
34
48
65
77
80
120
150
180
240
291
325
755
902
491
902
1005
619
1055
193
361
361
426
522
606
606
733
1295
793
1335
931
1395
1485
91
103
117
140
141
141
175
175
193
12
13
15
16
19
23
29
70
89
25
29
32
35
522
606
755
890
940
926
1000
91
103
117
140
141
141
175
193
193
361
426
1430
1465
1500
1610
Heat Dissipation
Drive Watts
2, 3, 4
156
200
205
210
215
220
361
426
522
606
755
902
13
15
17
21
25
33
42
3700
4100
4658
4100
4805
5342
5455
1110
1708
1708
1944
2664
2769
2769
6039
6175
6329
6875
7000
7525
8767
270
394
486
628
720
820
933
933
1110
9
15
20
27
36
54
84
230
331
29
57
87
117
2162
2315
3065
3625
3990
5015
5935
217
251
360
467
492
526
678
899
981
1533
1978
7120
8020
8925
10767
Heat Sink
Watts
2
486
721
819
933
1110
1110
1708
1944
2664
2769
3700
4100
15
21
32
42
56
72
116
4455
5002
5149
5002
5810
5961
6510
1303
2069
2069
2370
3186
3375
3375
361
497
603
768
861
961
1108
1108
1303
6772
7470
7122
8210
7931
8920
10252
21
28
35
43
55
77
113
300
420
54
86
119
152
2683
2921
3820
4515
4930
5941
6935
308
354
477
607
633
667
853
1092
1174
1894
2404
8550
9485
10425
12377
Total
Watts
2
642
921
1024
1143
1325
1330
2069
2370
3186
3375
4455
5002
28
36
49
63
81
105
158
Specifications and Supplemental Information
A–5
Derating Guidelines
Drive ratings can be affected by a number of factors. If more than one factor exists, derating percentages must be multiplied. For example, if a 42 Amp drive (B025) running at 8 kHz is installed at a
2,000 m (6,600 ft.) altitude and has a 2% high input line voltage, the actual amp rating will be:
42 x 94% Altitude Derate x 96% High Line Derate = 37.9 Amps.
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE / CARRIER FREQUENCY
Figure A
AQF05-AQF50 and BRF05-BRF100
Figure B
1336S-A010 and B020
Figure C
1336S-B025
Figure D
1336S-A015 and B030
Figure E
1336S-B040 and BX040
Standard Rating for Enclosed Drive in
40
°
C Ambient & Open Drive in 50
°
C Ambient.
100%
98%
96%
% of Drive
Rated Amps
94%
92%
90%
2
Derating Factor for Enclosed Drive in
Ambient between 41
°
C & 50
°
C.
4 6 8
Carrier Frequency in kHz
10
% of Drive
Rated Amps
100%
98%
96%
94%
92%
90%
2 4 6
Carrier Frequency in kHz
8
100%
96%
% of Drive
Rated Amps
92%
88%
84%
80%
2 4 6
Carrier Frequency in kHz
8
% of Drive
Rated Amps
100%
95%
90%
85%
80%
75%
70%
65%
2 4 6
Carrier Frequency in kHz
8
% of Drive
Rated Amps
100%
98%
96%
94%
92%
90%
88%
86%
2 4
Carrier Frequency in kHz
6
A–6
Specifications and Supplemental Information
Figure F
1336S-B050 and BX060
Figure G
1336S-A040, B075, C075
Figure H
1336S-A050, B100
Figure I
1336S-C100
Figure J
1336S-A060, B125, BX150
Figure K
1336S-C125
Standard Rating for Enclosed Drive in
40
°
C Ambient & Open Drive in 50
°
C Ambient.
% of Drive
Rated Amps
100%
95%
90%
85%
80%
75%
70%
65%
2
Derating Factor for Enclosed Drive in
Ambient between 41
°
C & 50
°
C.
4
Carrier Frequency in kHz
6
100%
98%
% of Drive
Rated Amps
96%
94%
92%
90%
2 4
Carrier Frequency in kHz
6
% of Drive
Rated Amps
100%
95%
90%
85%
80%
75%
70%
65%
2 4
Carrier Frequency in kHz
6
100%
98%
96%
% of Drive
Rated Amps
94%
92%
90%
2 4
Carrier Frequency in kHz
6
% of Drive
Rated Amps
100%
95%
90%
85%
80%
75%
70%
65%
2 4
Carrier Frequency in kHz
6
% of Drive
Rated Amps
100%
95%
90%
85%
80%
75%
70%
65%
2 4
Carrier Frequency in kHz
(40%)
6
Figure L
1336S-A075, B150
Figure M
1336S-A100, B200
Figure N
1336S-A125, B250
Figure O
1336S-BP250
Figure P
1336S-BP300
Figure Q
1336S-BP350
Specifications and Supplemental Information
A–7
Standard Rating for Enclosed Drive in
40
°
C Ambient & Open Drive in 50
°
C Ambient.
100%
96%
92%
% of Drive
Rated Amps
88%
84%
80%
2
Derating Factor for Enclosed Drive in
Ambient between 41
°
C & 50
°
C.
4
Carrier Frequency in kHz
6
% of Drive
Rated Amps
100%
95%
90%
85%
80%
75%
70%
65%
2 4
Carrier Frequency in kHz
6
% of Drive
Rated Amps
100%
95%
90%
85%
80%
75%
70%
65%
2 4
Carrier Frequency in kHz
(60%)
6
100%
96%
92%
% of Drive
Rated Amps
88%
84%
80%
2 4
Carrier Frequency in kHz
6
% of Drive
Rated Amps
100%
95%
90%
85%
80%
75%
70%
65%
2 4
Carrier Frequency in kHz
6
100%
90%
% of Drive
Rated Amps
80%
70%
60%
50%
2 4
Carrier Frequency in kHz
6
A–8
Specifications and Supplemental Information
Figure R
1336S-BP400
Figure S
1336S-BP450
Figure T
1336S-B500 and B600
Assumes two (2) 725 CFM cooling fans for
IP 20 (NEMA Type 1) enclosure
Figure U
1336S-CW10 through CW50
Figure V
1336S-C150
Figure W
1336S-C200
Standard Rating for Enclosed Drive in
40
°
C Ambient & Open Drive in 50
°
C Ambient.
100%
90%
% of Drive
Rated Amps
80%
70%
60%
50%
2
Derating Factor for Enclosed Drive in
Ambient between 41
°
C & 50
°
C.
4
Carrier Frequency in kHz
6
100%
90%
% of Drive
Rated Amps
80%
70%
60%
50%
2 4
Carrier Frequency in kHz
6
100%
90%
% of Drive
Rated Amps
80%
70%
60%
50%
2 4
Carrier Frequency in kHz
6
60 Hz
50 Hz
60 Hz
50 Hz
% of Drive
Rated Amps
100%
98%
96%
94%
92%
90%
2 4 6 8
Not
Recommended
10
Carrier Frequency in kHz
12
% of Drive
Rated Amps
100%
95%
90%
85%
80%
75%
70%
65%
2 4
Carrier Frequency in kHz
6
% of Drive
Rated Amps
100%
90%
80%
70%
60%
50%
40%
2 4
Carrier Frequency in kHz
6
Specifications and Supplemental Information
A–9
Figure X
1336S-C250
Figure Y
1336S-CX300
Figure Z
1336S-C300 through C600
Enclosed Drive in 40
°
C Ambient
Assumes two (2) 725 CFM cooling fans for
IP 20 (NEMA Type 1) enclosure
Figure AA
1336S-C300 through C600
Enclosed Drive in 41
°
- 50
°
C Ambient
Assumes two (2) 725 CFM cooling fans for
IP 20 (NEMA Type 1) enclosure
Standard Rating for Enclosed Drive in
40
°
C Ambient & Open Drive in 50
°
C Ambient.
% of Drive
Rated Amps
100%
90%
80%
70%
60%
50%
40%
2
Derating Factor for Enclosed Drive in
Ambient between 41
°
C & 50
°
C.
4
Carrier Frequency in kHz
6
100%
90%
% of Drive
Rated Amps
80%
70%
60%
50%
40%
2 4
Carrier Frequency in kHz
6
% of Drive
Rated Amps
100%
90%
80%
70%
60%
50%
40%
% of Drive
Rated Amps
100%
90%
80%
70%
60%
50%
40%
2 4
Carrier Frequency in kHz
6kHZ Data Not Available at Time of Printing
C300/
C350
C400
C450
C500
C600
6
C300
C350
C400
C450
C500
C600
2 3
Carrier Frequency in kHz
4
ALTITUDE AND HIGH INPUT VOLTAGE
Figure BB
Altitude – All Drive Ratings
100%
% of Drive
Rated Amps
90%
100%
Figure CC
High Input Voltage – Required Only for the following drives:
1336S-x025 – 18.5 kW (25 HP) at 8 kHz
1336S-x030 – 22 kW (30 HP) at 6 or 8 kHz
1336S-x060 – 45 kW (60 HP) at 6 kHz
% of Drive
Rated Amps
90%
80%
0 1,000
(3,300)
2,000
(6,600)
Altitude
3,000
(9,900)
4,000
(13,200)
m
(ft)
80%
240, 480 or 600V Nominal +2% +4% +6%
Input Voltage
+8% +10%
A–10
Specifications and Supplemental Information
Parameter Cross
Reference – By Number
No.
5
6
7
8
9
3
4
1
2
Group
Metering
Metering
Metering
Metering
Setup + Frequency Set
Frequency Set
Setup
Setup
Advanced Setup
➁
Motor Control
Setup + Adv. Setup
Advanced Setup
Advanced Setup
Advanced Setup
Feature Select
Feature Select
Setup + Adv. Setup
Setup + Adv. Setup
➁
Setup + Adv. Setup
➁
Setup + Adv. Setup
Setup + Adv. Setup
➁
Setup + I/O Config
4.01
Frequency Set
Metering
Frequency Set
I/O Config
Diagnostics
Frequency Set
Frequency Set
Frequency Set
Advanced Setup
Advanced Setup
Frequency Set
Frequency Set
Frequency Set
Frequency Set
Setup
Setup
Setup
Faults
Faults
Advanced Setup
Feature Select
Feature Select
Feature Select
Advanced Setup
Freq. Set + Enc. Fdbk.
Feature Select
Advanced Setup
➁
Advanced Setup
➁
Advanced Setup
➁
Faults
Advanced Setup
Metering
Metering
Diagnostics
Feature Select
Feature Select
Diagnostics
Diagnostics
Ratings
➀
Diagnostics
Meter. + Enc. Fdbk.
2.01
Diagnostics
Metering + Diagnostics
Metering
Diagnostics
Diagnostics
Metering + Diagnostics
Ratings
➀
Diagnostics
Frequency Set
Frequency Set
Frequency Set
Frequency Set
Enc. Fdbk. + Process PI
Name
Current Limit
Overload Mode
Overload Amps
Flt Clear Mode
Line Loss Fault
Motor Type
Slip @ F.L.A.
Dwell Frequency
Dwell Time
PWM Frequency
Pulse/Enc Scale
Language
Start Boost
Break Frequency
Break Voltage
Clear Fault
Stop Select 2
DC Bus Voltage
Output Current
Input Status
S Curve Time
S Curve Enable
Drive Status
Drive Alarm
Drive Type
Freq Source
Pulse/Enc Hertz
Set Defaults
Freq Command
Output Freq
Output Pulses
Drive Direction
Heatsink Temp
Firmware Ver.
Current Angle
Preset Freq 4
Preset Freq 5
Preset Freq 6
Preset Freq 7
Speed Control
Output Voltage
% Output Curr
% Output Power
Last Fault
Freq Select 1
Freq Select 2
Accel Time 1
Decel Time 1
DC Boost Select
Control Select
4.01
Stop Select 1
Bus Limit En
DC Hold Time
DC Hold Level
Run On Power Up
Reset/Run Time
Minimum Freq
Base Frequency
Base Voltage
Maximum Freq
Maximum Voltage
Input Mode
MOP Increment
Output Power
Jog Frequency
Analog Out Sel
Stop Mode Used
Preset Freq 1
Preset Freq 2
Preset Freq 3
Accel Time 2
Decel Time 2
Skip Freq 1
Skip Freq 2
Skip Freq 3
Skip Freq Band
Group
Masks
Masks
Masks
Masks
Masks
Owners
Owners
Owners
Owners
Owners
Owners
Owners
Owners
Owners
Adapter I/O
Adapter I/O
Adapter I/O
Adapter I/O
Adapter I/O
Adapter I/O
Feature Select
Feature Select
Feature Select
Faults
Faults
Advanced Setup
➁
Advanced Setup
Metering
Feature Select
Faults
Faults
Faults
Faults
Advanced Setup
Faults
Masks
Masks
Masks
Masks
Masks
Adapter I/O
Adapter I/O
Adapter I/O
Adapter I/O
Adapter I/O
Adapter I/O
Adapter I/O
Adapter I/O
Adapter I/O
Adapter I/O
Process Display
Process Display
Process Display
Metering
Metering
Metering
Metering
Diagnostics
Diagnostics
Faults
Faults
Faults
Faults
Ratings
➀
Ratings
➀
Ratings
➀
Advanced Setup
Encoder Feedback
Encoder Feedback
Encoder Feedback
I/O Config
Feature Select
Feature Select
Feature Select
I/O Config
No.
Name
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
124
125
126
127
128
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
92
93
94
95
96
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
129-136 Process 1 Txt 1-8
137
138
MOP Hertz
Pot Hertz
139
140
141
142
143
144
0-10 Volt Hertz
4-20 mA Hertz
Motor Mode
Power Mode
Flt Motor Mode
Flt Power Mode
Fault Frequency
Flt Driv Status
Drive Rtd Volts
Rated CT Amps
Rated CT kW
4-20 mA Loss Sel
Maximum Speed
Encoder Type
Motor Poles
Anlg Out Offset
Flying Start En
FStart Forward
FStart Reverse
Digital Out Sel
Reference Owner
Accel Owner
Decel Owner
Fault Owner
MOP Owner
Data In A1
Data In A2
Data In B1
Data In B2
Data In C1
Data In C2
Data In D1
Data In D2
Data Out A1
Data Out A2
Data Out B1
Data Out B2
Data Out C1
Data Out C2
Data Out D1
Data Out D2
Process 1 Par
Process 1 Scale
Traverse Period
Max Traverse
P Jump
Blwn Fuse Flt
Cur Lim Trip En
Run Boost
Analog Invert
Power OL Count
4.01
Reset/Run Tries
Fault Buffer 0
Fault Buffer 1
Fault Buffer 2
Fault Buffer 3
Analog Trim En
Low Bus Fault
Logic Mask
Local Mask
Direction Mask
Start Mask
Jog Mask
Reference Mask
Accel Mask
Decel Mask
Fault Mask
MOP Mask
Stop Owner
Direction Owner
Start Owner
Jog Owner
No.
158
159
160
161
162
163
165
166
167
168
169
Name
CR1 Out Select
4.01
Dig Out Freq
Dig Out Current
Dig Out Torque
Torque Current
Flux Current
Speed KI
Speed Error
Speed Integral
Speed Adder
Run/Accel Boost
2.01
Boost Slope
4.01
Rated Amps
Rated kW
55
56
57
59
60
61
52
53
54
62
63
64
65
66
67
69
73
74
75
76
77
70
71
72
39
40
41
42
43
44
36
37
38
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
23
24
25
26
27
28
20
21
22
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
15
16
17
18
19
10
11
12
13
14
170
171
X.xx
Firmware version X.xx or later.
➀ Located in the “Diagnostics” group for firmware versions before 2.01.
➁
“Motor Control” group for firmware versions 4.01 & later.
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
196
198
199
200
201
173 Fault Alarms
174-176 CR2-4 Out Select
4.01
177 Motor NP RPM
178
179
Motor NP Hertz
Local Owner
180 Process 2 Par
181 Process 2 Scale
182-189 Process 2 Txt 1-8
190
191
192
193
194
195
Motor NP Volts
4.01
Motor NP Amps
4.01
KI Amps
2.03
Flux Amps Ref
4.01
KP Amps
2.03
KI Volts
IR Drop Volts
4.01
Slip Comp Gain
4.01
KP Volts
Rated VT Amps
Rated VT kW
Flux Up Time
4.01
Motor OL Fault
4.01
Motor OL Count
4.01
VT Scaling
Ground Warning
2.01
Latched Alarms
2.01
Alarm Mask
2.01
Fault Data
4.01
Time Data 1
Time Data 3
Time Data 5
Time Data 7
DC Bus Memory
PI Config
3.01
PI Status
3.01
PI Ref Select
3.01
PI Fdbk Select
3.01
PI Reference
3.01
PI Feedback
3.01
PI Error
3.01
PI Output
3.01
KI Process
3.01
KP Process
3.01
PI Neg Limit
3.01
PI Pos Limit
3.01
PI Preload
4.01
Shear Pin Fault
4.01
Adaptive I Lim
4.01
LLoss FStart
4.01
Freq Ref SqRoot
4.01
Save MOP Ref
4.01
Hold Level Sel
4.01
Current Lmt Sel
4.01
Abs Analog Out
4.01
Set Anlg Out Lo
4.01
Set Anlg Out Hi
4.01
2nd Drive Sts
4.01
Set 0-10 Vlt Lo
4.01
Set 0-10 Vlt Hi
4.01
Set 4-20 mA Lo
4.01
Set 4-20 mA Hi
4.01
Group
Diagnostics
Masks
Faults
Linear List
Linear List
Linear List
Linear List
Diagnostics
2.03
Process PI
Process PI
Process PI
Process PI
Process PI
Process PI
Process PI
Process PI
Process PI
Process PI
Process PI
Process PI
Process PI
Faults
Setup
Feature Select
Frequency Set
Frequency Set
Advanced Setup
Setup
I/O Config
I/O Config
I/O Config
Diagnostics
Frequency Set
Frequency Set
Frequency Set
Frequency Set
I/O Config
I/O Config
I/O Config
I/O Config
Metering
Metering
Encoder Feedback
Encoder Feedback
Encoder Feedback
Encoder Feedback
Advanced Setup
Motor Control
Ratings
➀
Ratings
➀
Diagnostics
Faults
I/O Config
Setup + Enc. Fdbk.
Setup + Enc. Fdbk.
Owners
Process Display
Process Display
Process Display
Setup
Setup
Advanced Setup
➁
Motor Control
Advanced Setup
Linear List
Motor Control
Feature Select
Linear List
Ratings
➀
Ratings
➀
Motor Control
Faults
Metering
Setup
Faults
Specifications and Supplemental Information
A–11
Parameter Cross
Reference – By Name
Name
Cur Lim Trip En
Current Angle
Current Limit
Current Lmt Sel
4.01
Data In A1
Data In A2
Data In B1
Data In B2
Data In C1
Data In C2
Data In D1
Data In D2
Data Out A1
Data Out A2
Data Out B1
Data Out B2
Data Out C1
Data Out C2
Data Out D1
Data Out D2
DC Boost Select
DC Bus Memory
DC Bus Voltage
DC Hold Level
DC Hold Time
Decel Mask
Decel Owner
Decel Time 1
Decel Time 2
Dig Out Current
Dig Out Freq
Dig Out Torque
2nd Drive Sts
4.01
% Output Curr
% Output Power
0-10 Volt Hertz
4-20 mA Loss Sel
4-20 mA Hertz
Abs Analog Out
4.01
Accel Mask
Accel Owner
Accel Time 1
Accel Time 2
Adaptive I Lim
4.01
Alarm Mask
2.01
Analog Invert
Analog Out Sel
Analog Trim En
Anlg Out Offset
Base Frequency
Base Voltage
Blwn Fuse Flt
Boost Slope
4.01
Break Frequency
Break Voltage
Bus Limit En
Clear Fault
Control Select
4.01
CR1 Out Select
4.01
CR2-4 Out Select
4.01
Digital Out Sel
Direction Mask
Direction Owner
Drive Alarm
Drive Direction
Drive Rtd Volts
Drive Status
Drive Type
Dwell Frequency
Dwell Time
EEPROM Cksum
4.01
Encoder Type
Fault Alarms
Fault Buffer 0
Fault Buffer 1
No.
Group Name No.
Group Name No.
Group
158
94
103
60
69
147
59
61
12
99
108
8
31
160
159
161
43
44
172
152
173
86
87
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
9
212
53
13
114
115
116
117
232
111
112
113
236
2
3
139
150
140
233
98
Diagnostics
Metering
Metering
Metering
Advanced Setup
Metering
I/O Config
Masks
107
7
30
227
206
84
25
90
154
17
18
81
169
49
50
11
51
9
158
Owners
Setup
Advanced Setup
Setup
Masks
Advanced Setup
I/O Config
Advanced Setup
I/O Config
Setup
Setup
Faults
➁
➁
+ Adv. Setup
+ Adv. Setup
Motor Control
Advanced Setup
➁
Advanced Setup
➁
Advanced Setup
Faults
Motor Control
I/O Config
174-176 I/O Config
82 Faults
72
36
Diagnostics
Setup
Setup
Adapter I/O
Adapter I/O
Adapter I/O
Adapter I/O
Adapter I/O
Adapter I/O
Adapter I/O
Adapter I/O
Adapter I/O
Adapter I/O
Adapter I/O
Adapter I/O
Adapter I/O
Adapter I/O
Adapter I/O
Adapter I/O
Advanced Setup
➁
Diagnostics
Metering
2.03
Advanced Setup
Advanced Setup
Masks
Owners
Setup
Advanced Setup
I/O Config
I/O Config
I/O Config
I/O Config
Masks
Owners
Diagnostics
Diagnostics
Ratings
➀
Diagnostics
Ratings
➀
Feature Select
Feature Select
Diagnostics
Encoder Feedback
Faults
Faults
Faults
Fault Buffer 3
Fault Data
Fault Frequency
Fault Mask
Fault Owner
Firmware Ver.
Flt Clear Mode
Flt Driv Status
Flt Motor Mode
Flt Power Mode
Flux Amps Ref
4.01
Flux Current
Flux Up Time
4.01
Flying Start En
Freq Command
Freq Ref SqRoot
4.01
Freq Select 1
Freq Select 2
Freq Source
FStart Forward
FStart Reverse
Ground Warning
2.01
Heatsink Temp
Hold Level Sel
4.01
Input Mode
Input Status
IR Drop Volts
4.01
Jog Frequency
Jog Mask
Jog Owner
KI Amps
2.03
KP Amps
2.03
KI Process
3.01
KP Process
3.01
KI Volts
KP Volts
Language
Last Fault
Latched Alarms
2.01
Line Loss Fault
LLoss FStart
Local Mask
Local Owner
Logic Mask
Low Bus Fault
Max Traverse
Maximum Freq
Maximum Speed
Maximum Voltage
Minimum Freq
MOP Hertz
MOP Increment
MOP Mask
MOP Owner
Motor Mode
Motor NP Amps
4.01
Motor NP Hertz
Motor NP RPM
Motor NP Volts
4.01
Motor OL Count
4.01
Motor OL Fault
4.01
Motor Poles
Motor Type
Output Current
Output Freq
Output Power
Output Pulses
Output Voltage
Overload Amps
Overload Mode
P Jump
PI Config
3.01
PI Error
3.01
PI Fdbk Select
3.01
89
67
1
38
37
80
213
219
216
41
54
66
23
190
202
201
153
16
137
22
101
110
141
191
178
177
179
92
91
79
19
151
20
222
194
196
47
4
205
40
228
93
194
24
96
105
192
193
221
6
62
156
157
204
70
231
21
55
144
192
163
200
155
65
229
5
207
145
100
109
71
39
146
143
Faults
Faults
4.01
Faults
Masks
Owners
Ratings
➀
Faults
Faults
Faults
Faults
Motor Control
Metering
Motor Control
Feature Select
Metering + Diagnostics
Frequency Set
Setup + Freq. Set
Frequency Set
Diagnostics
Feature Select
Feature Select
Faults
Metering + Diagnostics
Advanced Setup
Setup + I/O Config
4.01
Diagnostics
Motor Control
Frequency Set
Masks
Owners
Advanced Setup
➁
Advanced Setup
Process PI
Process PI
Linear List
Linear List
Feature Select
Metering
Diagnostics
Faults
Feature Select
Masks
Owners
Masks
Faults
Feature Select
Setup + Adv. Setup
Encoder Feedback
Setup
➁
+ Adv. Setup
Setup + Adv. Setup
Metering
Frequency Set
Masks
Owners
Diagnostics
Setup
Enc. Fdbk. + Setup
4.01
Enc. Fdbk. + Setup
4.01
Setup
Metering
Faults
Encoder Feedback
Advanced Setup
Metering
Metering
Metering
Diagnostics
Metering
Setup
Setup
Feature Select
Process PI
Process PI
Process PI
PI Neg Limit
3.01
PI Output
3.01
PI Pos Limit
3.01
PI Preload
4.01
PI Ref Select
3.01
PI Reference
3.01
PI Status
3.01
Pot Hertz
Power Mode
Power OL Count
4.01
Preset Freq 1
Preset Freq 2
Preset Freq 3
Preset Freq 4
Preset Freq 5
Preset Freq 6
Preset Freq 7
Process 1 Par
Process 1 Scale
Process 1 Txt 1-8
Process 2 Par
Process 2 Scale
Process 2 Txt 1-8
Pulse/Enc Hertz
Pulse/Enc Scale
PWM Frequency
Rated Amps
Rated CT Amps
Rated CT kW
Rated kW
Rated VT Amps
Rated VT kW
Reference Mask
Reference Owner
Reset/Run Time
Reset/Run Tries
Run/Accel Boost
2.01
Run Boost
Run On Power Up
S Curve Enable
S Curve Time
Save MOP Ref
4.01
Set 0-10 Vlt Hi
4.01
Set 0-10 Vlt Lo
4.01
Set 4-20 mA Hi
4.01
Set 4-20 mA Lo
4.01
Set Anlg Out Hi
4.01
Set Anlg Out Lo
4.01
Set Defaults
Shear Pin Fault
4.01
Skip Freq 1
Skip Freq 2
Skip Freq 3
Skip Freq Band
Slip @ F.L.A.
Slip Comp Gain
4.01
Speed Adder
Speed Control
Speed Error
Speed Integral
Speed KI
Start Boost
Start Mask
Start Owner
Stop Mode Used
Stop Owner
Stop Select 1
Stop Select 2
Time Data 1
Time Data 3
Time Data 5
Time Data 7
Torque Current
Traverse Period
223
10
52
208
209
210
211
162
78
166
167
165
48
95
104
26
102
226
32
33
34
35
42
195
168
77
238
237
240
239
235
234
64
106
15
85
169
83
14
57
56
230
73
74
75
76
84
27
28
29
220
224
225
215
217
214
138
142
Process PI
Process PI
Process PI
Process PI
Process PI
Process PI
Process PI
Metering
Diagnostics
Metering
Frequency Set
Frequency Set
Frequency Set
Frequency Set
Frequency Set
Frequency Set
Frequency Set
127
128
Process Display
Process Display
129-136 Process Display
180 Process Display
181 Process Display
182-189 Process Display
63 Meter. + Enc. Fdbk.
2.01
46
45
170
148
149
171
198
199
97
Freq. Set + Enc. Fdbk.
Advanced Setup
Ratings
➀
Ratings
➀
Ratings
➀
Ratings
➀
Ratings
➀
Ratings
➀
Masks
Owners
Feature Select
Feature Select
Advanced Setup
Advanced Setup
➁
Feature Select
Feature Select
Feature Select
Frequency Set
I/O Config
I/O Config
I/O Config
I/O Config
I/O Config
I/O Config
Diagnostics
Faults
Frequency Set
Frequency Set
Frequency Set
Frequency Set
Feature Select
Feature Select
Encoder Feedback
Enc. Fdbk. + Process PI
Encoder Feedback
Encoder Feedback
Encoder Feedback
Advanced Setup
➁
Masks
Owners
Diagnostics
Owners
Setup + Adv. Setup
Advanced Setup
Linear List
Linear List
Linear List
Linear List
Metering
Feature Select
Fault Buffer 2
X.xx
88 Faults PI Feedback
3.01
218 Process PI VT Scaling 203 Setup
Firmware version X.xx or later.
➀
Located in the “Diagnostics” group for firmware versions before 2.01.
➁
“Motor Control” group for firmware versions 4.01 & later.
A–12
Specifications and Supplemental Information
HIM Character Map
5D
5E
5F
59
5A
5B
5C
56
57
58
52
53
54
55
4D
4E
4F
50
51
49
4A
4B
4C
44
45
46
47
48
40
41
42
43
3B
3C
3D
3E
3F
37
38
39
3A
34
35
36
30
31
32
33
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
27
28
29
2A
22
23
24
25
26
Hex
20
21
Character
X
]
^
_
Y
Z
[ a
M
N
O
I
J
K
L
D
E
F
G
H
@
A
B
C
T
U
V
W
P
Q
R
S
;
<
=
>
?
7
8
9
:
2
3
4
5
6
.
/
0
1
+
,
-
’
(
)
*
$
%
&
!
"
#
089
090
091
092
093
094
095
082
083
084
085
086
087
088
077
078
079
080
081
073
074
075
076
068
069
070
071
072
064
065
066
067
059
060
061
062
063
055
056
057
058
048
049
050
051
052
053
054
043
044
045
046
047
039
040
041
042
Decimal
032
033
034
035
036
037
038
M
N
O
I
J
K
L
D
E
F
G
H
@
A
B
C
=
>
?
9
:
;
<
4
5
6
7
8
0
1
2
3
{
|
} c d w x y z r s t u v n o p q k l m g h i j b c d e f
Character
b a
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
174
175
176
177
178
170
171
172
173
165
166
167
168
169
161
162
163
164
123
124
125
126
127
119
120
121
122
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
107
108
109
110
111
103
104
105
106
Decimal
096
097
098
099
100
101
102
BE
BF
C0
BA
BB
BC
BD
B7
B8
B9
B3
B4
B5
B6
AE
AF
B0
B1
B2
AA
AB
AC
AD
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A1
A2
A3
A4
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
77
78
79
7A
74
75
76
70
71
72
73
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
67
68
69
6A
62
63
64
65
66
Hex
60
61 u v w x y q r s t z
{
|
} n o p j a l m e f g h i
‘ b c d
^
Q
P
O
_
Z
[
\
]
U
V
W
X
Y
^
R
S
T
[
\
]
W
X
Y
Z
R
S
T
U
V
Character
P
Q
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
255
238
239
240
241
242
234
235
236
237
229
230
231
232
233
225
226
227
228
220
221
222
223
224
216
217
218
219
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
204
205
206
207
208
200
201
202
203
Decimal
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
F7
F8
F9
F3
F4
F5
F6
FA
FB
FC
FD
FF
EE
EF
F0
F1
F2
EA
EB
EC
ED
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
E1
E2
E3
E4
DC
DD
DE
DF
E0
D8
D9
DA
DB
D5
D6
D7
D1
D2
D3
D4
CC
CD
CE
CF
D0
C8
C9
CA
CB
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
Hex
C1
C2
Specifications and Supplemental Information
A–13
Communications Data
Information Format
Drive Status Structure
This provides the drive status information that will be sent to the logic controllers input image table when the Communication Module is set to control the drive.
Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Reference
ID
Reference 15 14 13 12
Freq Select 1 0 0 0 0
Preset Freq 1 0 0 0 1
Preset Freq 2 0 0 1 0
Preset Freq 3 0 0 1 1
Preset Freq 4 0 1 0 0
Preset Freq 5 0 1 0 1
Preset Freq 6 0 1 1 0
Preset Freq 7 0 1 1 1
Freq Select 2 1 0 0 0
Adapter 1 1 0 0 1
Adapter 2
Adapter 3
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
Adapter 4
Adapter 5
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
Adapter 6 1 1 1 0
Jog Frequency 1 1 1 1
Local
Adapter ID
Local 11 10 9
2
3
TB3
1
0 0 0
0 0 1
0 1 0
0 1 1
4
5
1 0 0
1 0 1
6 1 1 0
Unused 1 1 1
Enabled
Running
Command Direction
0 = Reverse
1 = Forward
Actual Direction
0 = Reverse
1 = Forward
Faulted
At Speed
Accelerating
Alarm
Decelerating
Logic Control Structure
This information provides the control logic information that is sent to the drive through the logic controllers output image table when the
Communication Module is set to control the drive.
Bit 15 Bit 14 Bit 13 Bit 12 Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 9 Bit 8 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
Reference Select
Reference 14 13 12
No Command 0 0 0
Freq Select 1 0 0 1
Freq Select 2 0 1 0
Preset Freq 3 0 1 1
Preset Freq 4 1 0 0
Preset Freq 5 1 0 1
Preset Freq 6 1 1 0
Preset Freq 7 1 1 1
Decel Time Accel Time Direction
Jog
Time 9/11 8/10
No Command 0 0
Time 1
Time 2
Hold Time
0
1
1
1
0
1
Clear Faults
Direction 5 4
No Command 0 0
Forward
Reverse
0
1
1
0
Hold Direction 1 1
Local Lockout
MOP Increment
Start
Stop
MOP Decrement
A–14
Specifications and Supplemental Information
Typical Programmable
Controller
Communications
Configurations
If block transfers are programmed to continuously write data to the drive, the EEPROM will quickly exceed its life cycle and malfunction. The 1336 PLUS does not use RAM to temporarily store parameter data, but rather stores the data immediately to the
EEPROM. Since the EEPROM has a defined number of “write” cycles available, frequent block transfers should not be programmed.
Using Datalink A
1
Programmable
Controller
I/O Image Table
Output Image
Block Transfer
Logic Command
Analog Reference
WORD 3
WORD 4
WORD 5
WORD 6
WORD 7
Input Image
Block Transfer
Logic Status
Analog Feedback
WORD 3
WORD 4
WORD 5
WORD 6
WORD 7
Remote I/O
Communication
Module
1336 PLUS
Adjustable Frequency
AC Drive
Datalink A
Datalink A
Parameter/Number
Data In A1
Data In A2
111
112
Data Out A1
Data Out A2
119
120
Typical Serial
Communications
Configurations
Input
WORD 1
WORD 2
WORD 3
WORD 4
WORD 5
WORD 6
WORD 7
WORD 8
WORD 9
WORD 10
Master Device
Register Objects
Output
WORD 1
WORD 2
WORD 3
WORD 4
WORD 5
WORD 6
WORD 7
WORD 8
WORD 9
WORD 10
Specifications and Supplemental Information
Without Block Transfer
1
Programmable
Controller
I/O Image Table
Output Image
Logic Command
Analog Reference
WORD 2
WORD 3
WORD 4
WORD 5
WORD 6
WORD 7
Input Image
Logic Status
Analog Feedback
WORD 2
WORD 3
WORD 4
WORD 5
WORD 6
WORD 7
Remote I/O
Communication
Module
A–15
1336 PLUS
Adjustable Frequency
AC Drive
Direct to
Drive
Logic
Datalink A
Datalink C
Direct from
Drive
Logic
Datalink A
Datalink C
Parameter/Number
Data In A1
Data In A2
111
112
Data In B1
Data In B2
Data In C1
Data In C2
Data In D1
Data In D2
113
114
115
116
117
118
Parameter/Number
Data Out A1
Data Out A2
119
120
Data Out B1
Data Out B2
121
122
Data Out C1
Data Out C2
123
124
Data Out D1
Data Out D2
125
126
1
Refer to the 1203 User Manual for further information.
Serial to SCANport
Communications Module
Output
WORD 1
WORD 2
WORD a
WORD a+1
WORD b
WORD b+1
WORD c
WORD c+1
WORD d
WORD d+1
Input
WORD 1
WORD 2
WORD a
WORD a+1
WORD b
WORD b+1
WORD c
WORD c+1
WORD d
WORD d+1
Direct to
Drive
Logic
Datalink A
Datalink B
Datalink C
Datalink D
Direct from
Drive
Logic
Datalink A
Datalink B
Datalink C
Datalink D
1336 PLUS
Adjustable Frequency
AC Drive
Parameter/Number
Data In A1
Data In A2
Data In B1
Data In B2
Data In C1
Data In C2
Data In D1
Data In D2
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
Parameter/Number
Data Out A1
Data Out A2
Data Out B1
Data Out B2
Data Out C1
Data Out C2
119
120
121
122
123
124
Data Out D1
Data Out D2
125
126
A–16
Specifications and Supplemental Information
Read/Write Parameter
Record
No. Name
5 Freq Select 1
Setting No. Name
47 Language
When using a Series B HIM, the parameters listed can be uploaded to the HIM for downloading to other drives.
Setting No. Name
120 Data Out A2
Setting No. Name
184 Process 2 Txt 3
Setting
6 Freq Select 2
7 Accel Time 1
8 Decel Time 1
9 DC Boost Select
9 Control Select
10 Stop Select 1
11 Bus Limit En
12 DC Hold Time
13 DC Hold Level
14 Run On Power Up
15 Reset/Run Time
16 Minimum Freq
17 Base Frequency
18 Base Voltage
19 Maximum Freq
20 Maximum Voltage
21 Input Mode
22 MOP Increment
24 Jog Frequency
25 Analog Out Sel
27 Preset Freq 1
28 Preset Freq 2
29 Preset Freq 3
30 Accel Time 2
31 Decel Time 2
32 Skip Freq 1
33 Skip Freq 2
34 Skip Freq 3
35 Skip Freq Band
36 Current Limit
37 Overload Mode
38 Overload Amps
39 Flt Clear Mode
40 Line Loss Fault
41 Motor Type
42 Slip @ F.L.A.
43 Dwell Frequency
44 Dwell Time
45 PWM Frequency
46 Pulse/Enc Scale
48 Start Boost
49 Break Frequency
50 Break Voltage
52 Stop Select 2
56 S Curve Time
57 S Curve Enable
73 Preset Freq 4
74 Preset Freq 5
75 Preset Freq 6
76 Preset Freq 7
77 Speed Control
78 Traverse Period
79 Max Traverse
80 P Jump
81 Blwn Fuse Flt
82 Cur Lim Trip En
83 Run Boost
84 Analog Invert
85 Reset/Run Tries
90 Analog Trim En
91 Low Bus Fault
92 Logic Mask
93 Local Mask
94 Direction Mask
95 Start Mask
96 Jog Mask
97 Reference Mask
98 Accel Mask
99 Decel Mask
100 Fault Mask
101 MOP Mask
111 Data In A1
112 Data In A2
113 Data In B1
114 Data In B2
115 Data In C1
116 Data In C2
117 Data In D1
118 Data In D2
119 Data Out A1
121 Data Out B1
122 Data Out B2
123 Data Out C1
124 Data Out C2
125 Data Out D1
126 Data Out D2
127 Process 1 Par
128 Process 1 Scale
129 Process 1 Txt 1
130 Process 1 Txt 2
131 Process 1 Txt 3
132 Process 1 Txt 4
133 Process 1 Txt 5
134 Process 1 Txt 6
135 Process 1 Txt 7
136 Process 1 Txt 8
150 4-20 mA Loss Sel
151 Maximum Speed
152 Encoder Type
154 Anlg Out Offset
155 Flying Start En
156 FStart Forward
157 FStart Reverse
158 Digital Out Sel
158 CR1 Out Select
159 Dig Out Freq
160 Dig Out Current
161 Dig Out Torque
165 Speed KI
169 Run/Accel Boost
169 Boost Slope
174 CR2 Out Select
175 CR3 Out Select
176 CR4 Out Select
177 Motor NP RPM
178 Motor NP Hertz
180 Process 2 Par
181 Process 2 Scale
182 Process 2 Txt 1
183 Process 2 Txt 2
185 Process 2 Txt 4
186 Process 2 Txt 5
187 Process 2 Txt 6
188 Process 2 Txt 7
189 Process 2 Txt 8
190 Motor NP Volts
191 Motor NP Amps
192 KI Amps
192 Flux Amps Ref
193 KP Amps
194 IR Drop Volts
195 Slip Comp Gain
200 Flux Up Time
201 Motor OL Fault
203 VT Scaling
204 Ground Warning
206 Alarm Mask
213 PI Config
215 PI Ref Select
216 PI Fdbk Select
221 KI Process
222 KP Process
223 PI Neg Limit
224 PI Pos Limit
225 PI Preload
226 Shear Pin Fault
227 Adaptive I Lim
228 LLoss FStart
229 Freq Ref SqRoot
230 Save MOP Ref
231 Hold Level Sel
232 Current Lmt Sel
233 Abs Analog Out
234 Set Anlg Out Lo
235 Set Anlg Out Hi
237 Set 0-10 Vlt Lo
238 Set 0-10 Vlt Hi
239 Set 4-20 mA Lo
240 Set 4-20 mA Hi
Appendix
B
Dimensions
Appendix B provides detailed dimension information for the 1336
PLUS. Included are:
•
IP 20 (NEMA Type 1) Dimensions.
•
IP65/54 (NEMA Type 4/12) Dimensions.
•
Heat Sink-through-the-Back Cutout Dimensions.
•
TB1 Terminal Block Dimensions for D, E & G Frame Drives.
•
Typical Mounting of a G Frame Open Chassis Drive in a User
Supplied Enclosure.
Important:
The dimensions given on the following drawings are for estimating purposes only. Contact your Allen-Bradley
Sales Office if certified drawings are required.
B–2
Y
Dimensions
A
D
IP 20 (NEMA Type 1) Dimensions – Frames A1 through A4
Z
C Max.
AA E B
Mounting Hole Detail
7.0 (0.28)
7.0 (0.28)
12.7 (0.50)
BB
12.7 (0.50)
Mounting Holes (4) – See Detail
Bottom View Will Vary with HP – See Bottom View Dimensions
All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches)
All Weights in Kilograms and (Pounds)
CC
Frame
Reference
A1
A2
A3
A4
A
215.9
(8.50)
215.9
(8.50)
215.9
(8.50)
260.0
(10.24)
B
290.0
(11.42)
290.0
(11.42)
290.0
(11.42)
350.0
(13.78)
C Max.
160.0
(6.30)
180.5
(7.10)
207.0
(8.15)
212.0
(8.35)
1
Refer to Chapter 1 for catalog numbers and Appendix for derating info.
D
185.2
(7.29)
185.2
(7.29)
185.2
(7.29)
230.0
(9.06)
E
275.0
(10.83)
275.0
(10.83)
275.0
(10.83)
320.0
(12.60)
Y
15.35
(0.60)
15.35
(0.60)
15.35
(0.60)
15.35
(0.60)
Three-Phase Rating
1, 2
200-240V
380-480V
0.37-0.75 kW
0.5-1 HP
1.2-1.5 kW
1.5-2 HP
2.2-3.7 kW
3-5 HP
–
5.5-11 kW
7.5-15 HP
15-22 kW
20-30 HP
30-45 kW
40-60 HP
–
56-93 kW
75-125 HP
–
0.37-1.2 kW
0.5-1.5 HP
1.5-2.2 kW
2-3 HP
3.7 kW
5 HP
5.5-7.5 kW *
7.5-10 HP
5.5-22 kW *
7.5-30 HP
30-45 kW
40-60 HP
45-112 kW
60-150 HP
112-187 kW
150-250 HP
187-336 kW
250-450 HP
187-448 kW
250-600 HP
500-600V
–
–
–
0.75-3.7 kW
1-5 HP
5.5-15 kW
7.5-20 HP
18.5-45 kW
25-60 HP
56-93 kW
75-125 HP
112-187 kW
150-250 HP
187-336 kW
250-450 HP
224-448 kW
300-600 HP
Frame
Reference
A1
A2
A3
A4
B1/B2
C
D
E
F
G
*
Use care when choosing Frame Reference - Some ratings may exist in another frame size.
Z
7.5
(0.30)
7.5
(0.30)
7.5
(0.30)
15.35
(0.60)
AA
130.0
(5.12)
130.0
(5.12)
130.0
(5.12)
130.0
(5.12)
BB
76.2
(3.00)
76.2
(3.00)
76.2
(3.00)
133.0
(5.23)
CC
85.3
(3.36)
85.3
(3.36)
85.3
(3.36)
86.0
(3.39)
Shipping
Weights
4.31 kg
(9.5 lbs.)
5.49 kg
(12.1 lbs.)
6.71 kg
(14.8 lbs.)
15.90 kg
(35.0 lbs.)
2
kW/HP are constant torque (CT) ratings.
Y
A
D
IP 20 (NEMA Type 1) Dimensions – Frames B, C, D
Z
AA
E B
Mounting Hole Detail
(Frames B & C)
7.1 (0.28)
7.1 (0.28)
12.7 (0.50)
12.7 (0.50)
Dimensions
B–3
C Max.
CC
Mounting Holes (4) – See Detail
BB
Mounting Hole Detail
(Frame D)
R 5.2 (0.20)
14.7 (0.58)
R 9.5 (0.38)
Bottom View Will Vary with HP – See Bottom View Dimensions
All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches)
All Weights in Kilograms and (Pounds)
C
D
Frame
Reference
B1/B2
A
276.4
(10.88)
301.8
(11.88)
381.5
(15.02)
B
476.3
(18.75)
701.0
(27.60)
1240.0
(48.82)
C Max.
225.0
(8.86)
225.0
(8.86)
270.8
(10.66)
D
212.6
(8.37)
238.0
(9.37)
325.9
(12.83)
E
461.0
(18.15)
685.8
(27.00)
1216.2
(47.88)
Y
32.00
(1.26)
32.00
(1.26)
27.94
(1.10)
Z
7.6
(0.30)
7.6
(0.30)
11.94
(0.47)
AA
131.1
(5.16)
131.1
(5.16)
131.1
(5.16)
BB
180.8
(7.12)
374.7
(14.75)
688.6
(27.11)
CC
71.9
(2.83)
71.9
(2.83)
83.6
(3.29)
Shipping
Weight
22.7 kg
(50 lbs.)
38.6 kg
(85 lbs.)
108.9 kg
(240 lbs.)
Y
B–4
Dimensions
A
D
IP 20 (NEMA Type 1) & Open Dimensions – Frame E
Z
C Max.
E B
AA
37.9
(1.49)
BB
Mounting Hole Detail
Dia. 10.2 (0.40)
17.0 (0.67)
Dia. 19.1 (0.75)
See Bottom View Dimensions for Details
CC
Mounting Holes (4) – See Detail
All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches)
All Weights in Kilograms and (Pounds)
Frame
Reference
E – Enclosed
E – Open
A
511.0
(20.12)
511.0
(20.12)
B
1498.6
(59.00)
1498.6
(59.00)
C Max.
424.4
(16.71)
372.6
(14.67)
D
477.5
(18.80)
477.5
(18.80)
E
1447.8
(57.00)
1447.8
(57.00)
Y
16.8
(0.66)
16.8
(0.66)
Z
40.1
(1.61)
40.1
(1.61)
AA
195.0
(7.68)
138.4
(5.45)
BB
901.4
(35.49)
680.0
(26.77)
CC
151.9
(5.98)
126.3
(4.97)
Shipping
Weight
186 kg
(410 lbs.)
163 kg
(360 lbs.)
Dimensions
IP 20 (NEMA Type 1) & Open Dimensions – Frame F
All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches)
762.0
(30.00)
635.0
(25.00)
Open Chassis
487.7 (19.20)
252.7
(9.95)
B–5
2286.0
(90.00)
37.9
(1.49)
193.0
(7.60)
1219.2
(48.00)
31.5
(1.24)
698.5
(27.50)
Conduit
Access Area
274.8
(10.82)
298.5
(11.75)
Approximate Shipping Weight (drive & pallet):
415.0 kg (915 lbs.)
Bottom View
50.8
(2.00)
B–6
Dimensions
Removable Lifting Angle
IP 20 (NEMA Type 1) & Open Dimensions – Frame G
63.5 (2.50)
117.3
(4.62)
Open Chassis Dimensions
Depth = 508.3 (20.01)
Weight = 453.6 kg (1000 lbs.)
2324.1
(91.50)
1524.0
(60.00)
19.3
(0.76)
648.0
(25.51)
Important: Two (2) 725 CFM fans are required if an open type drive is mounted in a user supplied enclosure.
762.0
(30.00)
Conduit
Access Area
635.0
(25.00)
All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches)
See Bottom View Dimensions for Details
A
D
IP 65/54 (NEMA Type 4/12) Dimensions
See Detail A
12.4 (0.49)
H
Dimensions
B–7
F
C
G
See
Detail B
E B
7.9 (0.31)
Typical Top and Bottom
Drive
Heatsink
All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches)
Frame
Reference
A1
A2
A3
A4
B1
B2
5.5 kW (7.5 HP) at 200-240V AC
5.5-11 kW (7.5-15 HP) at 380-480V AC
5.5-7.5 kW (7.5-10 HP) at 500-600V AC
7.5-11 kW (10-15 HP) at 200-240V AC
15-22 kW (20-30 HP) at 380-480V AC
11-15 kW (15-20 HP) at 500-600V AC
C
A
430.0
(16.93)
430.0
(16.93)
430.0
(16.93)
655.0
(25.79)
655.0
(25.79)
655.0
(25.79)
655.0
(25.79)
B
525.0
(20.67)
525.0
(20.67)
525.0
(20.67)
650.0
(25.59)
650.0
(25.59)
900.0
(35.43)
1200.0
(47.24)
C
350.0
(13.78)
350.0
(13.78)
350.0
(13.78)
425.0
(16.74)
425.0
(16.74)
425.0
(16.74)
425.0
(16.74)
12.7 (0.50)
12.7 (0.50)
Detail A
7.1 (0.28) Dia.
14.3 (0.56) Dia.
D
404.9
(15.94)
404.9
(15.94)
404.9
(15.94)
629.9
(24.80)
629.9
(24.80)
629.9
(24.80)
629.9
(24.80)
E
500.1
(19.69)
500.1
(19.69)
500.1
(19.69)
625.1
(24.61)
625.1
(24.61)
875.0
(34.45)
1174.5
(46.22)
19.1 (0.75)
F
250.0
(9.84)
250.0
(9.84)
250.0
(9.84)
293.0
(11.54)
293.0
(11.54)
293.0
(11.54)
293.0
(11.54)
Detail B
G
N/A
N/A
N/A
63.5
(2.50)
63.5
(2.50)
63.5
(2.50)
63.5
(2.50)
12.7 (0.50) Dia.
19.1 (0.75) Dia.
H
N/A
N/A
N/A
76.2
(3.00)
76.2
(3.00)
76.2
(3.00)
76.2
(3.00)
Approx. Ship
Weight
16.8 kg
(37.0 lbs.)
17.9 kg
(39.4 lbs.)
18.6 kg
(41.0 lbs.)
39.5 kg
(87.0 lbs.)
44.7 kg
(98.5 lbs.)
56.5 kg
(124.5 lbs.)
80.7 kg
(178.0 lbs.)
B–8
Dimensions
IP 20 (NEMA Type 1) Bottom View Dimensions – Frames A through C
Frames A1 through A4
P
Q
R
S
22.2 (0.88) Conduit Knockout - 1 Plc.
22.2/28.6 (0.88/1.13)
Conduit Knockout - 3 Plcs.
N
M L
Fans will be present on A4 Frame
A2
A3
A4
Frame
Reference
A1
L
111.8
(4.40)
132.3
(5.21)
158.8
(6.25)
164.0
(6.45)
M
105.4
(4.15)
126.0
(4.96)
152.4
(6.00)
164.0
(6.45)
N
86.3
(3.40)
106.9
(4.21)
133.4
(5.25)
139.0
(5.47)
P
31.0
(1.22)
31.0
(1.22)
31.0
(1.22)
27.0
(1.06)
Q
69.1
(2.72)
69.1
(2.72)
69.1
(2.72)
65.0
(2.56)
R
102.1
(4.02)
102.1
(4.02)
102.1
(4.02)
97.0
(3.82)
S
135.4
(5.33)
135.4
(5.33)
135.4
(5.33)
128.7
(5.07)
Frames B and C
P
Q
R
S
28.6/34.9 (1.13/1.38)
Conduit Knockout - 3 Plcs.
22.2 (0.88) Conduit Knockout - 1 Plc.
All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches)
M
L
Frame
Reference
B1/B2
C
L
181.6
(7.15)
181.6
(7.15)
M
167.1
(6.58)
167.1
(6.58)
P
112.8
(4.44)
119.1
(4.69)
Q
163.6
(6.44)
182.6
(7.19)
R
214.4
(8.44)
233.4
(9.19)
S
249.9
(9.84)
275.3
(10.84)
All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches)
144.0 (5.67)
52.1 (2.05)
34.9/50.0 (1.38/1.97)
Conduit Knockout - 1 Plc.
198.1
(7.80)
169.4
(6.67)
131.6
(5.18)
Dimensions
IP 20 (NEMA Type 1) Bottom View Dimensions – Frames D–G
Frame D
343.9 (13.54)
261.4 (10.29)
62.7/76.2 (2.47/3.00)
Conduit Knockout - 2 Plcs.
34.9 (1.38)
Conduit Knockout - 3 Plcs.
153.7
(6.05)
204.5
(8.05)
B–9
178.3 (7.02)
38.6 (1.52)
12.7 (0.50) Conduit Knockout - 6 Plcs.
311.2
(12.25)
260.4
(10.25)
209.6
(8.25)
Frame E
432.3 (17.02)
305.3 (12.02)
50.8 (2.0)
88.9/101.6 (3.50/4.00)
Conduit Knockout - 3 Plcs.
660.4 (26.00)
Conduit Access Area
431.8
(17.00)
(Top)
50.8 (2.00)
Frame G
431.8
(17.00)
29.0 (1.14)
547.6
(21.56)
Conduit
Access Area
254.0
(10.00)
298.5
(11.75)
42.9
(1.69)
381.0
(15.00)
(Bottom)
15.9 (0.63) Dia. - 2 Mtg. Holes
B–10
Dimensions
78.1
(3.076)
249.7
1
(9.83)
234.2
(9.2204)
78.2
(3.080)
220.0
(8.66)
Heat Sink Through-the-Back Mounting – Frames A1 through A3
210.0
1
(8.25)
196.0
(7.72)
98.0
(3.86)
182.1
(7.17)
Cutout
All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches)
10 Required
4.3 (0.171) Dia. for 10/32 Taptite
®
(or equiv.) – 4.0 (0.159) for 10/32 threaded
Back of Enclosure
Drive
A1 = 50.8 (2.00)
A2 = 71.4 (2.81)
A3 = 98.8 (3.85)
1
Shading indicates approximate size of drive inside enclosure.
80.4
(3.17)
Heat Sink Through-the-Back Mounting – Frame A4
257.0
1
(10.12)
241.3
(9.50)
160.9
(6.33)
120.7
(4.75)
225.0
(8.86)
Dimensions
B–11
301.2
(11.86)
317.0
1
(12.48)
225.9
(8.89)
150.6
(5.93)
285.0
(11.22)
Cutout
75.3
(2.96)
All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches)
14 Required
4.3 (0.171) Dia. for 10/32 Taptite
®
(or equiv.) – 4.0 (0.159) for 10/32 threaded
Drive
Back of Enclosure
90.0 (3.54)
1
Shading indicates approximate size of drive inside enclosure.
B–12
Dimensions
Heat Sink Through-the-Back Mounting – Frame B1/B2
267.2
1
(10.52)
6.35
(0.25)
257.1
(10.12)
244.4
(9.62) 435.4
1
(17.14)
410.2
(16.15)
2.54
(0.10)
415.3
(16.35)
308.6
(12.15)
283.2
(11.15)
Cutout as Viewed from INSIDE Enclosure
127.0
(5.00)
All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches)
8 Required
4.3 (0.171) Dia. for 10/32 Taptite
®
(or equiv.) – 4.0 (0.159) for 10/32 threaded
Drive
Back of Enclosure
129.3 (5.09)
1
Shading indicates approximate size of drive inside enclosure.
635.0
(25.00)
4.8
(0.19)
Heat Sink Through-the-Back Mounting – Frame C
303.8
1
(11.96)
282.5
(11.12)
4.8
(0.19)
644.7
(25.38)
Cutout
273.1
(10.75)
508.0
(20.00)
Dimensions
B–13
660.4
1
(26.00)
381.0
(15.00)
1
254.0
(10.00)
127.0
(5.00)
Shading indicates approximate size of drive inside enclosure.
12 Required
4.3 (0.171) Dia. for 10/32 Taptite
®
(or equiv.)
4.0 (0.159) for 10/32 threaded
All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches)
Drive
Back of Enclosure
129.3 (5.09)
B–14
Detail
4.6 (0.18)
1118.6
(44.04)
Dimensions
9.9 (0.39)
26.7
(1.05)
Heat Sink Through-the-Back Mounting – Frame D
375.2
1
(14.77)
362.2
(14.26)
356.1
(14.02)
6.1
(0.24)
See Detail
1145.3
(45.09)
1054.4
(41.51)
962.7
(37.90)
1178.1
1
(46.38)
806.7
(31.76)
650.8
(25.62)
Cutout as Viewed from INSIDE Enclosure
867.4
(34.15)
773.9
(30.47)
680.5
(26.79)
587.0
(23.11)
494.5
(19.47)
338.6
(13.33)
182.6
(7.19)
26.7
(1.05)
1
Shading indicates approximate size of drive inside enclosure.
* Minimum dimension allowed – More space will improve fan effectiveness and heat dissipation.
All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches)
Drive
16 Required
4.3 (0.171) Dia. for 10/32 Taptite
®
(or equiv.)
4.0 (0.159) for 10/32 threaded
Back of Enclosure
84.1 (3.31) *
1422.4
1
(56.00)
1095.8
(43.14)
5.8
(0.23)
Heat Sink Through-the-Back Mounting – Frame E
508.0
1
(20.00)
489.0
(19.25)
127.0
(5.00)
54.1
(2.13)
1084.1
(42.68)
Cutout
477.3
(18.79)
Dimensions
B–15
1
127.0
(5.00)
75.4
(2.97)
5.8
(0.23)
All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches)
26 Required
4.3 (0.171) Dia. for 10/32 Taptite
®
(or equiv.)
4.0 (0.159) for 10/32 threaded
Shading indicates approximate size of drive inside enclosure.
* Minimum dimension allowed – More space will improve fan effectiveness and heat dissipation.
Drive
Back of Enclosure
132.33 (5.21) *
B–16
Dimensions
TB1 Dimensions for D & E Frame Drives
27.0
(1.10)
35.0
(1.38)
31.0
(1.22)
61.5
(2.42)
93.0
(3.66)
42.0
(1.65)
M10 Stud (Approximate 0.375 in.) - 2 Places
Recommended Torque - 10 N-m (87 lb.-in.)
Recommended Wrench - 17 mm
75 x 31 (2.95 x 1.22)
Removable Bar
18.0
(0.71)
28.0
(1.10)
23.0
(0.91)
63.5
(2.50)
69.0
(2.72)
Also applies to TB1 on D Frame Drives
35.0
(1.38)
M8 Stud (Approximate 0.313 in.) - 2 Places
Recommended Torque - 6 N-m (52 lb.-in.)
Recommended Wrench - 13 mm
50.8 x 24 (2.00 x 0.95)
Removable Bar
206.2 (8.12)
41.7 (1.64)
TB1 Dimensions for G Frame Drives
6.3 (0.25)
117.3 (4.62)
Dimensions
B–17
9.7 (0.38)
16.0 (0.63)
50.8
(2.00)
31.8
(1.25)
25.4
(1.00)
70.0
(2.75)
10.2 (0.40) Dia.
Typical - 15 Plcs.
19.1
(0.75)
16.0
(0.63)
31.8
(1.25)
B–18
Dimensions
Typical Frame G Mounting in User Supplied Enclosure
14.2 (0.56)
11.1 x 19.1
(0.44 x 0.75)
41.1
(1.62)
82.6 (3.25)
134.1
(5.28)
55.1
(2.17)
Bracket
Important: This information represents the method used to factory mount an open type Frame G in an enclosure specifically designed by
Allen-Bradley. Illustrations are only intended to identify structural mounting points and hardware shapes. You must design and fabricate steel components based on the actual mounting configuration, calculated loads and enclosure specifications.
Minimum thickness of all parts = 4.6 (0.18).
188.0
(7.40)
Length =
549.4 (21.63)
154.2
(6.07)
2 Plcs.
Each End
Rail
57.2
(2.25)
Brace
25.4 (1.00)
14.5 (0.57) 682.2 (26.86)
711.2 (28.00)
50.8 (2.00)
0.75 (19.1)
Requirements for
Conforming Installation
Appendix
C
CE Conformity
Low Voltage Directive
The following low voltage directives apply:
•
EN 60204-1
•
PREN 50178
EMC Directive
This apparatus is tested to meet Council Directive 89/336
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) using a technical construction file and the following standards:
•
EN 50081–1, –2 – Generic Emission Standard
•
EN 50082–1, –2 – Generic Immunity Standard
Declarations of Conformity to the European Union Directives are available. Please contact your Allen-Bradley Sales Representative.
Marked for all applicable directives
1
Emissions EN 50081-1
EN 50081-2
EN 55011 Class A
EN 55011 Class B
Immunity EN 50082-1
EN 50082-2
IEC 801-1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8 per EN50082-1, 2
1
Note: Installation guidelines stated below must be adhered to.
Important: The conformity of the drive and filter to any standard does not guarantee that the entire installation will conform.
Many other factors can influence the total installation and only direct measurements can verify total conformity.
The following six items are required for CE conformance:
1. Standard 1336 PLUS Drive 0.37-448 kW (0.5-600 HP) CE compatible (Series D or higher).
2. Factory installed EMC enclosure (-AE option) or field installed EMC
Enclosure Kit (1336x-AEx – see page C–2).
3. Filter as called out on the following page.
4. Grounding as shown on page C–3.
5. Input power (source to filter) and output power (filter to drive & drive to motor) wiring must be braided, shielded cable with a coverage of 75% or better, metal conduit or other with equivalent or better attenuation, mounted with appropriate connectors. For shielded cable it is recommended to use a compact strain relief connector with double saddle clamp for filter and drive input and compact strain relief connector with EMI protection for motor output.
6. Control (I/O) and signal wiring must be in conduit or have shielding with equivalent attenuation.
C–2
Filter
CE Conformity
Filter Selection
Filter Catalog
Number
Three-Phase
Volts
200-240V
380-480V
200-240V
380-480V
200-240V
380-480V
200-240V
380-480V
200-240V
380-480V
200-240V
380-480V
1336-RFB-150-D 200-240V
380-480V
1336-RFB-180-D 200-240V
380-480V
1336-RFB-340-E 200-240V
380-480V
1336-RFB-475-G 380-480V
1336-RFB-590-G 380-480V
1336-RFB-670-G 380-480V
Used with . . .
1336S-AQF05 - AQF10
1336S-BRF05 - BRF20
1336S-AQF15 - AQF20
1336S-BRF30 - BRF50
1336S-AQF30 - AQF50
1336S-BRF75, BRF100
1336S-A007
1336S-B007 - B015
1336S-A010 - A015
1336S-B020 - B030
1336S-A020 - A030
1336S-BX040 - BX060
1336S-A040 - A050
1336S-B060 - B100
1336S-A060
1336S-B125 - BX150
1336S-A075 - A125
1336S-B150 - B250
1336S-BX250 - B350
1336S-B400 - B450
1336S-B500 - B600
D
D
D
C
D
B
B
B
C
E
E
G
G
G
Frame
Reference
A1
A1-A2
A2
A2-A3
A3
A4
B
RFI Filter Installation
Important:
Refer to the instructions supplied with the filter for details.
The RFI filter must be connected between the incoming AC supply line and the drive input terminals.
Electrical Configuration
CE Conformity
C–3
RFI Filter Leakage Current
The RFI filter may cause ground leakage currents. Therefore a solid ground connection must be provided as shown below.
!
ATTENTION: To guard against possible equipment damage, RFI filters can only be used with AC supplies that are nominally balanced and grounded with respect to ground. In some installations, three-phase supplies are occasionally connected in a 3-wire configuration with one phase grounded (Grounded Delta). The filter must not be used in Grounded Delta supplies.
Conduit/4-Wire Cable
RFI
Filter
R (L1)
S (L2)
T (L3)
PE
Shield Terminated in Cable
Clamp on A Frame Drives
Nearest
Building Structure Steel
ESC SEL
JOG
Grounding
RFI Filter Grounding
Important:
Using the optional RFI filter may result in relatively high ground leakage currents. Surge suppression devices are also incorporated into the filter. Therefore, the filter must be permanently installed and solidly grounded (bonded) to the building power distribution ground. Ensure that the incoming supply neutral is solidly connected (bonded) to the same building power distribution ground.
Grounding must not rely on flexible cables and should not include any form of plug or socket that would permit inadvertent disconnection. Some local codes may require redundant ground connections. The integrity of all connections should be periodically checked.
C–4
CE Conformity
Mechanical Configuration
Important: Drive and filter must be mounted to a common back plane with a positive electrical bond and in close proximity to one another.
Three-Phase
Input
1
Important: A positive electrical bond must be maintained between drive and filter at all 4 corners. Star washers can be eliminated if a positive electrical bond is assured.
Three-Phase Input
1
Star Washers
Flat Washer
Bolt
Access
Panel
Bolt
To Motor
1
1336 PLUS
Cable Supplied with Filter
1
Frames A1 - A4
2
Conduit
1
To Motor
1
1336 PLUS & FORCE
Frames B & C
2
1
2
Input power (source to filter) and output power (filter to drive and drive to motor) wiring must be in conduit or have shielding/armor with equivalent attenuation.
Shielding/armor must be bonded to the metal bottom plate. See requirements 6 & 7 on page C–1.
Refer to the Filter Selection table on page C–2 for frame references and corresponding catalog numbers.
Three-Phase
Input
1
CE Conformity
Filter Mounting (continued)
Important: Drive and filter must be mounted to a common back plane with a positive electrical bond. Spacing is determined by Conduit Box.
Filter Mounting
Bracket
Three-Phase
Input
1
C–5
Access Panel and
Input Terminal Block
Lower Access Panel
To Motor
1
To Motor
1
Conduit Box
1336 PLUS & FORCE
(Through-the-Wall Mounting)
Frames D & E
2
1
Conduit Box
1
Filter Mounting
Bracket
Nipple/Fitting
1336 PLUS & FORCE
(Conventional Mounting)
Frames D & E
2
1
2
Input power (source to filter) and output power (filter to drive and drive to motor) wiring must be in conduit or have shielding/armor with equivalent attenuation.
Shielding/armor must be bonded to the metal bottom plate. See requirements 6 & 7 on page C–1.
Refer to the Filter Selection table on page C–2 for frame references and corresponding catalog numbers.
C–6
CE Conformity
Filter Mounting (continued)
Important: A positive electrical bond must be maintained between the enclosure and filter (including brackets), fans, and drive. To assure a positive electrical bond, any paint near all mounting points must be removed.
Important: Cooling fans are required for proper drive operation. Refer to the PLUS/FORCE User
Manual for CFM recommendations.
Typical Connection to Drive
75.0
(2.95)
Mounting Brackets
All Dimensions in Millimeters and (Inches)
AC Input Terminals
831.0
(32.72)
Important: This information represents the method used to mount 1336-RFB-475, 590 & 670 filters in an Allen-Bradley supplied EMC enclosure. User supplied EMC enclosures must follow all of the guidelines shown. Illustrations are only intended to identify structural mounting points and hardware shapes. You must design and fabricate steel components based on the actual mounting configuration, calculated loads and enclosure specifications. Refer to the PLUS/FORCE User Manual for drive mounting requirements.
Typical Bracket for Stability
1336 PLUS & FORCE
(Typical Mounting)
Frame G
2
1
2
Input power (source to filter) and output power (filter to drive and drive to motor) wiring must be in conduit or have shielding/armor with equivalent attenuation.
Shielding/armor must be bonded to the metal bottom plate. See requirements 6 & 7 on page C–1.
Refer to the Filter Selection table on page C–2 for frame references and corresponding catalog numbers.
CE Conformity
C–7
Control I/O
Frames A1 through A4
Filter Input Motor Output
Required Knockout Assignments
Dimensions are in Millimeters and (Inches)
Filter Input
Frames B and C
Motor Output
Control I/O
SCANport
SCANport
22.2/28.6 (0.88/1.13) - 3 Plcs.
22.2 (0.88) - 1 Plc.
28.6/34.9 (1.13/1.38) - 3 Plcs.
22.2 (0.88) - 1 Plc.
Filter Input
Frame D
Motor Output
Control I/O
SCANport
Filter Input
Frame E
Motor Output
Control I/O
SCANport
(Side of Drive)
34.9/50.0 (1.38/1.97) - 1 Plc.
34.9 (1.38) - 3 Plcs.
62.7/76.2 (2.47/3.00) - 2 Plcs.
88.9/104.8 (3.50/4.13)
2 Plcs.
12.7 (0.50)
3 Plcs.
C–8
CE Conformity
End of Appendix
Appendix
D
Spare Parts Information
Current 1336 PLUS spare parts information including recommended parts, catalog numbers and pricing can be obtained from the following sources:
•
Allen-Bradley home page on the World Wide Web at
http://www.ab.com
then select . . .
“Drives” followed by . . .
“Product Information” and . . .
“Service Information . . .”
•
Standard Drives “AutoFax” service – an automated system that you can call to request a “faxed” copy of the spare parts information (or other technical document).
Simply call 216-646-6701 (440-646-6701 after 8/16/97) and follow the phone prompts to request document(s) 1060 (230V drives) and/or 1070 (460 & 575V drives).
D–2
Variable Content TTL:Chap Is Linked To HD:Running
End of Appendix
Index
A
AC Supply Source, 2–3
Adapter Definitions, 2–38
Alarms, 6–8
Analog Invert, 5–15
Auto Restart, 5–22
B
Bypass Contactors, 2–6
C
Cable Termination, 2–34
Catalog Number Explanation, 1–2
CE Conformity, 2–8, C–1
Common Mode Cores, 2–34
Contacts, Fault, 6–1
Control Interface Option
Board Removal/Installation, 2–37
L4/L4E, 2–30
L5/L5E, 2–31
L6/L6E, 2–32
TB3 Description, 2–25
Control Status Mode, 3–5
Custom Volts/Hz, 5–51
D
DC Brake to Stop, 5–17
Derate Guidelines, A–5
Dimensions
Frame G Mounting Hardware, B–18
Heat Sink Through the Back, B–10,
B–11
IP 20 (NEMA Type 1)
Bottom Views, B–8
Front Views, B–2
IP 65/54 (NEMA Type 4/12),
Enclosure, B–7
TB1 – Frame G, B–17
TB1 – Frames D & E, B–16
Display Mode, 3–5
Distances Between Devices, 2–38
Distribution Systems
Unbalanced, 2–3
Ungrounded, 2–3
Drive Status Structure, A–13
Dwell, 5–21
E
EEProm Mode, 3–5
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD), 1–2
Encoder Wiring, 2–32
Engineering Unit, 5–6
ENUM, 5–6
F
Fan Voltage, Selecting/Verifying, 2–35
Fault Buffer History, 5–29
Faults
Adptr Freq Err, 6–2
Auxiliary, 6–2
BGND 10ms Over, 6–2
Blwn Fuse Flt, 6–2
Diag C Lim Flt, 6–2
Drive –> HIM, 6–2
Drive Fault Reset, 6–2
EE Init Read, 6–2
EE Init Value, 6–2
EEprom Checksum, 6–2
EEprom Fault, 6–2
FGND 10ms Over, 6–2
Ground Fault, 6–3
Ground Warning, 6–3
Hertz Err Fault, 6–3
Hertz Sel Fault, 6–3
HIM –> Drive, 6–3
Loop Overrn Flt, 6–3
Max Retries Fault, 6–3
Motor Mode Flt, 6–3
Motor Stall Fault, 6–4
Neg Slope Fault, 6–4
Op Error Fault, 6–4
Open Pot Fault, 6–4
Overcurrent Flt, 6–4
Overload Fault, 6–4
Overtemp Fault, 6–4
Overvolt Fault, 6–4
P Jump Err Flt, 6–5
Phase U Fault, 6–4
Phase V Fault, 6–5
Phase W Fault, 6–5
Poles Calc Flt, 6–5
Power Loss Fault, 6–5
Power Mode Fault, 6–5
Power Overload, 6–5
Power Test Flt, 6–5
Precharge Fault, 6–5
Precharge Open, 6–5
Reprogram Fault, 6–6
ROM or RAM Fault, 6–6
I–2
Index
Run Boost Fault, 6–6
Serial Fault, 6–6
Shear Pin Fault, 6–6
Temp Sense Open, 6–6
Undervolt Fault, 6–6
UV Short Fault, 6–6
UW Short Fault, 6–6
VW Short Fault, 6–6
Xsistr Desat Flt, 6–6
Filtering, RFI, 2–8, 2–9, C–3
Frame References, 1–1
Frequency Select, 5–19
Function Index, 5–1
Fusing, Input, 2–5
G
Grounding, 2–8
H
Human Interface Module (HIM)
Character Map, A–12
Description, 3–1
Key Descriptions, 3–2
Operation, 3–4
Removal, 3–15
I
Input Devices, 2–6
Input Mode Selection, 2–28
Input Power Conditioning, 2–4
Input/Output Rating, A–2
Interference, EMI/RFI, 2–7
Isolation Transformer, 2–4
L
L4/L4E Option, 2–30
L5/L5E Option, 2–31
L6/L6E Option, 2–32
Line Loss Restart, 5–30
Logic Control Structure, A–13
Low Speed Operation, 4–10
Lug Kits, 2–12
M
Min./Max. Frequency, 5–11
Motor Cable Length, 2–15
Motor Starting/Stopping, 2–6
Mounting, 2–1
N
Nameplate Location, 1–4
O
Output Configuration, 5–26
Output Devices, 2–34
Overload, 5–13
P
Parameter Cross Ref.
By Name, A–11
By Number, A–10
Parameter Record, A–16
Parameters
% Output Curr, 5–9
% Output Power, 5–9
0-10 Volt Hertz, 5–8
2nd Drive Sts, 5–34
4-20 mA Hertz, 5–8
4-20 mA Loss Sel, 5–16
Abs Analog Out, 5–28
Accel Mask, 5–40
Accel Owner, 5–42
Accel Time, 5–10, 5–16
Adaptive I Lim, 5–12
Alarm Mask, 5–41
Analog Invert, 5–15
Analog Out Sel, 5–28
Analog Trim En, 5–15
Anlg Out Offset, 5–28
Base Frequency, 5–53
Base Voltage, 5–53
Blwn Fuse Flt, 5–31
Boost Slope, 5–52
Break Frequency, 5–52
Break Voltage, 5–52
Bus Limit En, 5–18
Clear Fault, 5–29
Control Select, 5–51
CR Out Select, 5–26
Cur Lim Trip En, 5–29
Current Angle, 5–37
Current Limit, 5–11
Current Lmt Sel, 5–12
Data In, 5–43
Data Out, 5–43
DC Boost Select, 5–14
DC Bus Memory, 5–37
DC Bus Voltage, 5–7
DC Hold Level, 5–17
DC Hold Time, 5–17
Decel Mask, 5–40
Decel Owner, 5–42
Decel Time, 5–10, 5–16
Dig Out Current, 5–26
Dig Out Freq, 5–26
Dig Out Torque, 5–27
Digital Out Sel, 5–26
Direction Mask, 5–39
Direction Owner, 5–41
Drive Alarm, 5–34
Drive Direction, 5–35
Drive Rtd Volts, 5–38
Drive Status, 5–34
Drive Type, 5–38
Dwell Frequency, 5–21
Dwell Time, 5–21
EEPROM Cksum, 5–37
Encoder Type, 5–45
Fault Alarms, 5–33
Fault Buffer, 5–29
Fault Data, 5–31
Fault Frequency, 5–32
Fault Mask, 5–40
Fault Owner, 5–42
Firmware Ver., 5–38
Flt Clear Mode, 5–33
Flt Driv Status, 5–32
Flt Motor Mode, 5–31
Flt Power Mode, 5–32
Flux Amps Ref, 5–51
Flux Current, 5–9
Flux Up Time, 5–52
Flying Start En, 5–24
Freq Command, 5–7, 5–35
Freq Ref SqRoot, 5–20
Freq Select, 5–10, 5–19
Freq Source, 5–35
FStart Forward, 5–24
FStart Reverse, 5–24
Ground Warning, 5–33
Heatsink Temp, 5–8, 5–37
Hold Level Sel, 5–17
Input Mode, 5–10, 5–26
Input Status, 5–35
IR Drop Volts, 5–52
Jog Frequency, 5–19
Jog Mask, 5–39
Jog Owner, 5–42
KI Amps, 5–18
KI Process, 5–49
KP Amps, 5–18
KP Process, 5–49
Language, 5–24
Last Fault, 5–9
Latched Alarms, 5–35
Index
Line Loss Fault, 5–29
LLoss Restart, 5–24
Local Mask, 5–40
Local Owner, 5–42
Logic Mask, 5–40
Low Bus Fault, 5–31
Max Traverse, 5–25
Maximum Freq, 5–11, 5–14
Maximum Speed, 5–45
Maximum Voltage, 5–53
Minimum Freq, 5–11, 5–14
MOP Hertz, 5–8
MOP Increment, 5–20
MOP Mask, 5–40
MOP Owner, 5–42
Motor Mode, 5–36
Motor NP Amps, 5–13
Motor NP Hertz, 5–13, 5–46
Motor NP RPM, 5–13, 5–46
Motor NP Volts, 5–13
Motor OL Count, 5–9
Motor OL Fault, 5–29
Motor Poles, 5–45
Motor Type, 5–18
Output Current, 5–7
Output Freq, 5–7
Output Power, 5–7
Output Pulses, 5–37
Output Voltage, 5–7
Overload Amps, 5–13
Overload Mode, 5–12
P Jump, 5–25
PI Config, 5–47
PI Error, 5–49
PI Fdbk Select, 5–48
PI Feedback, 5–49
PI Neg Limit, 5–49
PI Output, 5–49
PI Pos Limit, 5–49
PI Preload, 5–50
PI Ref Select, 5–48
PI Reference, 5–48
Pot Hertz, 5–8
Power Mode, 5–36
Power OL Count, 5–9
Preset Freq, 5–19
Process 1 Par, 5–44
Process 1 Scale, 5–44
Process 1 Txt, 5–44
Process 2 Par, 5–44
Process 2 Scale, 5–44
Process 2 Txt, 5–44
Pulse/Enc Hertz, 5–8, 5–46
Pulse/Enc Scale, 5–21, 5–45
PWM Frequency, 5–15
Rated Amps, 5–38
Rated CT Amps, 5–38
I–3
I–4
Index
Rated CT kW, 5–39
Rated kW, 5–38
Rated VT Amps, 5–39
Rated VT kW, 5–39
Reference Mask, 5–40
Reference Owner, 5–42
Reset/Run Time, 5–23
Reset/Run Tries, 5–22
Run Boost, 5–52
Run On Power Up, 5–22
Run/Accel Boost, 5–15
S Curve Enable, 5–23
S Curve Time, 5–23
Save MOP Ref, 5–20
Set 0–10 Vlt Hi, 5–27
Set 0–10 Vlt Lo, 5–27
Set 4–20 mA Hi, 5–27
Set 4–20 mA Lo, 5–27
Set Anlg Out Hi, 5–28
Set Anlg Out Lo, 5–28
Set Defaults, 5–37
Shear Pin Fault, 5–29
Skip Freq, 5–20
Skip Freq Band, 5–20
Slip Comp Gain, 5–22
[email protected]., 5–22
Speed Adder, 5–46
Speed Control, 5–22, 5–45, 5–47
Speed Error, 5–46
Speed Integral, 5–46
Speed KI, 5–46
Start Boost, 5–52
Start Mask, 5–39
Start Owner, 5–41
Stop Mode Used, 5–36
Stop Owner, 5–41
Stop Select, 5–11, 5–16, 5–18
Torque Current, 5–9
Traverse Period, 5–25
VT Scaling, 5–13
Password Mode, 3–5
Power Loss Ride-Thru, 5–30
Preset Frequency, 5–19
Process Mode, 3–5
Program Mode, 3–5
Programmable Controller Config., A–14
Programming Flow Chart, 5–1
Pulse Input, 2–23
R
Reactors, 2–4
Remote I/O, 5–43
Reset Defaults, 4–3
S
S Curve, 5–23
Search Mode, 3–5
Serial Communications, A–13
Skip Frequency, 5–20
Software Compatibility, 1–1
Specifications
Control, A–2
Electrical, A–2
Environment, A–1
Input/Output Ratings, A–2
Protection, A–1
Flux Vector vs. V/Hz, 4–5, 4–11
Speed Select Inputs, 2–26
Startup Procedure, 4–1
Status Display, 3–5
T
Terminal Blocks
Auxiliary Output, 2–37
Locations, 2–11
TB1, 2–12
TB2, 2–22
TB3, 2–25
TB4/TB6, 2–36
Traverse Function, 5–25
Troubleshooting
Clearing a Fault, 6–1
Fault Code Cross Ref., 6–7
Fault Descriptions, 6–1
Fault Display, 6–1
U
User Supplied Enclosures, A–4
V
Volts/Hz Pattern, 5–51
W
Wiring
Control and Signal, 2–21
Control Interface, 2–23
Encoder, 2–32
Power, 2–11
Publication 1336 PLUS-5.0 – April, 2001 P/N 74001-003-01
Supersedes 1336 PLUS-5.0 – September, 2000, 1336 PLUS-5.3DU3 – October, 1998 and 1336S-DU002A-EN-P – September, 2000 Copyright 2001 Rockwell International Corporation. All rights reserved. Printed in USA.
Advertisement
Key Features
- Sensorless Vector Control
- Adjustable Frequency
- Communication Capabilities
- Built-in Braking
- Multiple Enclosure Options
- User-Friendly Programming
- Enhanced Parameter Resolution
- Multiple Control Interface Options